Strata DK Programming Manual (May 2000)

726+,%$
Telecommunication Systems Division
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
Programming Manual
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.3 and ACD
May 2000

Strata DK
exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your
line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company
General End User Information
to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
4. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ1CX, RJ2EX, RJ2GX,
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the
RJ48C, RJ48X, RJ11, RJ14C, RJ21X (see Network Requirements in this
provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission's Rules and
document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
Regulations.
Radio Frequency Interference
FCC Requirements
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may
established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company--
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
interference.
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
U
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
® L
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
call Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division
Important Notice -- Music-On-Hold
in Irvine, CA (949) 583-3700.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or
compatibility or use of the Strata DK system, the telephone company will notify you in
TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this
advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby
disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata DK system to the
telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
1. Your telephone number.
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
2. FCC registration number:
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system. The
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of
the Equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
the system.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
be registered as a Key telephone system.
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
service in some situations.
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
telephone system registration in some areas.
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
the user to disconnect the equipment.
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
for assistance.
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
DK14 and DK40i
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Key system: CJ6MLA-74479-KF-E
Hybrid: CJ6MLA-74478-MF-E
DK424
CAUTION!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
electrician, as appropriate.
PBX: CJCHN-22757-PF-E
DK424i
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
PBX: CJ6JPN-22758-PF-E
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
3. Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas,
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not
Publication Information
© Copyright 2000
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
Telecommunication Systems Division
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means--graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems--without
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a registered
trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Strata AirLink, Call Center
Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
DKA-MA-PRGRM-VF
Version D.2, October 1998 (Update TBDK-0021)
4025071
Version D.1, September 1998 (Update TBDK-0019)
Version F, May 2000 (DK424i)
Version D, June 1998 (Update TBDK-0009)
Version E.2, March 2000
Version C, October 1997
Version E.1, August 1999
Version B, April 1997
Version E, May 1999
Version A.1, February 1997 (Update TB16-0003)
Version D.3, December 1998 (Format change)
Version A, December 1996

Introduction
This manual provides for programming the following Strata DK digital business telephone
systems:
Strata DK14, Release 3.1
Strata DK40i, DK424 and DK424i, Release 4.3
It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers.
This manual uses simplified, generic system record sheets that have legends that show you specific
port configurations for Strata DK14, DK40i, DK424 and DK424i systems. After using the legends,
copy the generic record sheets as required to accommodate your system ports and settings.
The Installation and Maintenance (I&M) Manual, a companion book, covers the installation and
maintenance information and instructions for the Strata DK systems discussed in this book.
Organization
This manual is organized as follows for your convenience:
Chapter 1 Overview includes general programming information and basic instructions on
how to program the system with a 20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone.
Chapter 2 Initialization & Test includes information for initializing and test programs.
Chapter 3 System & Station includes programming information for the entire system and
individual stations.
Chapter 4 Toll Restriction includes programming information for Toll Restriction.
Chapter 5 Least Cost Routing includes programming information for Least Cost Routing.
Chapter 6 Automatic Call Distribution includes ACD programming for DK40i, DK424,
and DK424i Release 4.3.
Chapter 7 ISDN includes programming instructions and record sheets for Integrated
Systems Digital Networking features for the DK40i, DK424 and DK424i.
Chapter 8 E911 includes programming information for connecting the DK40i, DK424 and
DK424i to Enhanced 911 CAMA trunks.
Glossary/Index
The programs in each chapter are given in numerical order (except Initialization and Test which is
given in order of importance). The "*" programs are located behind the program of the same name
(e.g., Program *09 follows Program 09).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
vii

Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
Note
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to
specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
CAUTION!
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING!
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or
[DN]
intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number
[PDN]
for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on
[SDN]
another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
Represents all of the DK424i processors. The DK424i processors are:
BCU
B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU.
B2CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B2CAU/B2CBU.
B3CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU.
B5CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B2CBU.
$ULDO %ROG
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
"Type"
Indicates entry of a string of text.
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
"Press"
Enter.
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter.
Plus (+)
Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means "through." Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.

Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.

Denotes a procedure.
Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button. A

number on the black button represents a specific LED button.
Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
See Figure 10
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
viii
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Related Documents/Media
Note
Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI, or in
print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication
Information on the back of the document's title page.
General Descriptions
Strata DK General Description
Strata DK Call Center Solutions General Description
Installation and Programming
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual
Strata DK Programming Manual
Strata AirLink Wireless Systems Installation Guide
Feature Description
Strata DK Feature Description Manual
User Guides
Digital Telephone
Digital Single Line Telephone
Electronic Telephone
Standard Telephone
DKT2004-CT Cordless Telephone
DKT2104-CT Cordless Telephone
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset
PC/Data Interface
System Administrator Guide
PC Attendant Console
Call Center Viewer
ACD Agent Guide
ACD Supervisor Guide
Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual
Keyprint 2000
Strata DK Programming 5/00
ix

Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Quick Reference Guides
Digital Telephone
Electronic Telephone
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless
PC Attendant Console
CD-ROMs
Strata DK Library
Strata DK HMIS
StrataControl
DKi Quote
DKi Admin/DKi Backup
Strata DK424 Insight DK (Insight works with the DK424i also)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all Strata DK
documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications.
x
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
1
Ov
erv
iew
Numerical Program Listing
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata DK program numbers, titles and program
types.
ts
er
eT
Program Title
ation &
ram Numb
t Cost Routing
N
ll Restriction
D
o
Prog
Initializ
System
Station
T
Leas
AC
ISD
Part 1: Software Check/Remote Maintenance Security Code
00
X
Assignments
00
Part 2: RCTU: Random Access Memory (RAM) Test
X
01
Station Logical Port Display and/or Change
X
02
Station Physical Port Display and/or Change
X
03
Flexible PCB Cabinet and Slot Assignments
X
X
*03
Cabinet Type Identification
X
04
Station Logical Port Primary Directory Number Assignment
X
*04
[PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] for Internal Tie Line Calls
X
05
Flexible Access Code Numbering
X
*05
Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing
X
09
Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt/Station Assignments
X
X
*09
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID External Assignments
X
X
10-1~3
System Assignments, Basic Timing
X
X
10-4
ACD Parameters and ISDN PRI and BRI T-wait Timers
X
X
*10-11
E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment
X
*10-12
E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment
X
*10-91
E911 Interdigital TImer
X
*10-92
E911 Pause Before Send TImer
X
11
ACD Timing Assignments
X
*11-1~9
CAMA Trunk Assignments
X
12
System Assignments
X
*12
ANI Station Information
X
13
Defining the Message Center
X
*13
Station Group Information
X
14-0
Loop/Ground Start CO Line Direct Ring to ACD Group Assignments
X
14-1
ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments
X
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-1

Overview
Numerical Program Listing
st
g
e
in
T
tion
Rout
Program Title
tion &
st
strice
ion
ogram Number
at
ll R
D
o
Pr
Initializa
System
St
T
Least Co
AC
ISDN
*14-1
Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID
X
14-2
ACD Supervisor Passwords
X
*14-2
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Line After Shift and Overflow Substitution Destination
X
14-3
Announcement / Music Port Assignments and Queue Pattern
X
14-4
Queue Time Out Overflow Destination
X
14-5
Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Assignments
X
14-6
After Shift Service Destination
X
14-71
Queue Size for Alarm (Immediate Assignments)
X
14-72
Queue Size for Alarm 1
X
14-73
Queue Size for Alarm 2
X
14-8
Alarm Pattern Assignments
X
14-9
Work Unit Assignments / Stroke Digit Length
X
15
Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options
X
X
*15
CO Line Tenant Assignments
X
16
Assign CO Line Groups (Dial 9, 81~84, 81~88 or 801~816)
X
X
*16
ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment
X
17
DID/Tie Line Options
X
X
*17
DID Intercept Port Number
X
18
Agent ID Code Name for MIS Assignments
X
19
Alternate Background Music (BGM) Source Slot Assignment
X
20
Computer Interface Unit and Data Interface Unit Configuration
X
21
Modem Pool Port Assignments
X
22
Computer and Data Interface Units (DIU) Station Hunting (Data Calls)
X
23
Built-in Primary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments
X
24
Built-in Secondary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments
X
25-1
Incoming Built-in Auto Attendant Call Overflow Time
X
26
Built-in Auto Attendant Camp-on-Busy Time
X
27
Digital Telephone Handset/Headset Receiver Volume Level
X
28
DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments
X
29-1~8
DSS Console Button Assignments Console Number
X
*29
Add-on Module Button Assignments
X
30
Station Class of Service
X
*30
Telephone Group Page Assignments
X
31
Station Class of Service
X
*31
Group Pickup Assignments
X
32
Automatic Preference
X
*32
RS-232 (SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary) Voice Mail Message Center Port
X
33
Station Intercom and Directory Number Hunting (Voice Calls Only)
X
*33
Phantom Directory Number [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignments
X
1-2
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
Numerical Program Listing
st
g
e
in
T
tion
Rout
Ov
Program Title
tion &
st
stric
erv
e
ion
i
D
ew
ogram Number
at
ll Ro
Pr
Initializa
System
St
T
Least Co
AC
ISDN
34
Hold Recall Timing
X
Station Class of Service (Standard Telephone Camp-on Busy and Busy
*34
X
Override Tone Option)
35
Station Class of Service
X
X
36
Fixed Call Forward (Voice Calls Only)
X
*36
System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment
X
37
CO and Tie Line Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time
X
*37
Park Recall Timing
X
38
Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type
X
39
Flexible Button Assignment
X
X
40
Station CO Line Access
X
*40
Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments
X
41
Station Outgoing Call Restriction
X
*41-1
T1 Span Frame and Coding Assignments
X
X
*41-2
T1 Channel Assignments
X
X
*41-3
T1 Span Transmit (Send) Level Pad Assignments
X
*41-4
T1 Span Receive Level Pad Assignments
X
42-0
CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection
X
42-1~8
PBX/Centrex Access Code
X
*42-1
T1 Span Primary Reference Assignments
X
*42-2
T1 Span and Secondary Timing (Backup) Reference Assignments
X
43
0 + Credit Card Dialing Option
X
*43-1~3
D-Channel Control and NFAS Assignments
X
*43-4
PRI Explicit/Implicit Coding
X
44-1~8
Toll Restriction Class (1~8)/Traveling Class Override Codes
X
44-91~93
Emergency Bypass of Forced/Verified Account Codes
X
*44
BRI Service Profile Identifier (SPID) Parameters
X
45-1
LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan
X
X
45-2
Toll Restriction Disable
X
Special Common Carrier (SPCC) Numbers and Authorization Code Digit
45-3~6
X
Length
45-8~9
Toll Restriction Override Code
X
*45-1
Toll Restriction for Office Codes in Local and All Other Area Codes
X
LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass for Special Numbers That Do Not Being
*45-2
X
X
with or # Digits
*45-3
LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass - Special Numbers Beginning with or #
X
X
*45-4
LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass
X
X
46-2~4
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class
X
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office Codes Assigned by Class for
46-6~8
X
Local Calls
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-3

Overview
Numerical Program Listing
st
g
e
in
T
tion
Rout
Program Title
tion &
st
strice
ion
ogram Number
at
ll R
D
o
Pr
Initializa
System
St
T
Least Co
AC
ISDN
46-10~80
Toll Restriction Class Parameters
X
46-11~81
Toll Restriction Class Parameters
X
46-21,46-31
46-41,
46-51,
Toll Restriction Classes 2~8
X
46-61,
46-71,
46-81
47
Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes
X
48
Station Toll Restriction Classification
X
50-1
Least Cost Routing Parameters
X
50-2
Least Cost Routing Home Area Code
X
50-31~35
Least Cost Routing Special Code
X
50-4
Least Cost Routing Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number
X
50-5
Least Cost Routing Local Call Plan Number
X
50-6
Least Cost Routing Dial Zero Time-out
X
Caller ID (RCIU/RCIS) Circuit Assignments to CO Line (RCOU, RCOS,
*50
X
RGLU, and PCOU)
51
Least Cost Routing Area Codes
X
Station Memory Allocation to Store Caller ID and/or ANI Numbers on
*51
X
Abandoned/ Unanswered Calls
52
Least Cost Routing Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code
X
Caller ID or ANI Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Circuit Abandoned Call
*52
X
Number Store Station Owner Assignments
53
Least Cost Routing Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans
X
54
Least Cost Routing Route Definition Tables
X
55-0
Least Cost Routing Modified Digits Table (Delete)
X
55-1~2
Least Cost Routing Modified Digits Table (Add)
X
56
Least Cost Routing Station Group Assignments
X
58-1
Attendant Console Overflow Timer
X
Attendant Console Display Type, Answer Button Operation, and Call
58-2
X
Waiting Tone
58-4
Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments
X
58-5
Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments
X
59
Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes
X
60-1
SMDR Data Output Options
X
*60
BRI Assignment for Line/Station Operation
X
60-2~7
SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length
X
60-8
Call Forward External (Remote Change, Security) ID Code
X
*61
Analog Trunk Bearer Service
X
*62
Non-ISDN Station Bearer Service
X
*63
Timer for Sending Dialed Digits
X
1-4
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
Numerical Program Listing
st
g
e
in
T
tion
Rout
Ov
Program Title
tion &
st
stric
erv
e
ion
i
D
ew
ogram Number
at
ll Ro
Pr
Initializa
System
St
T
Least Co
AC
ISDN
*64-1
Direct Inward Dialing Parameters
X
*64-2
Number of DID/DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups
X
*65
Call by Call Channel Group Assignment
X
*66-1
Channel Group Number Parameters
X
*66-2,
Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID
X
*66-4
*66-3
Channel Group/Trunk Parameters
X
*66-5
Line Directory Number (LDN) Registration
X
*66-6
LDN/Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments
X
*66-7
LDN/Trunk Group Assignments
X
*67-1
Trunk Group Call Direction
X
*67
Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported
X
*67
Call Types for ISDN Trunk Groups
X
*67
ISDN Trunk Group Maximum Channel Reservation
X
*68-1
Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters
X
*68-2
Outbound CNIS Parameters
X
69
Verified Account Codes
X
*69-1
CNIS Presentation Parameters
X
*69-2
Special Number Assignment
X
70
Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Class Assignments
X
71-0
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines
X
71-1~3
DNIS Number and ANI Line Routing Assignments
X
X
71-4
DNIS Number and ANI Only Lines Voice Mail (VM) ID Assignments
X
71-5
DNIS Number Name Display
X
*71~*73
[DN] to [DN], Tie to [DN], and DID to [DN] Ringing Assignments
X
72
DNIS Network Table Assignments
X
74
System NT Button Lock Password
X
76-1
TSIU, WSIU, RSIU, RSIS, and RMDS Port Assignments
X
76-2
TSIU, WSIU, RSIU, RSIS, and RMDS Port Assignments
X
Peripheral Options RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, IMDU, PIOU, PIOUS, and
77-1
X
PEPU
77-2
Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock Assignments
X
77-3
Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones
X
RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI) Data Output Assignments
77-4
X
(Caller ID/DNIS/ANI Open Architecture Output Options)
Ground and Loop Start CO Line Special Ringing Assignments, DISA,
78
X
IMDU, RMDS, and Night Ringing Over External Page
79
Door Phone Ringing
X
*79
Door Phone to [DN] Flashing Assignments
X
80
Electronic and Digital Telephone Ringing Tones (CO Line Calls)
X
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-5

Overview
Numerical Program Listing
st
g
e
in
T
tion
Rout
Program Title
tion &
st
strice
ion
ogram Number
at
ll R
D
o
Pr
Initializa
System
St
T
Least Co
AC
ISDN
*80
Call Forward Station Ring Assignment (Release 3.2)
X
Ground/Loop Start/ CO Line to Directory Number Button LED Flash
*81, *84, *87
X
Assignments
Ground/Loop Start/CO Line/Station Auto Attendant, Attendant Console,
81~89
X
and Distributed Hunt Group Ringing Assignments
90
Initializing Program 00~*99
X
91-1
Automatic PCB Recognition/Port Renumber
X
91-2
Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory
X
91-9
System Initialization
X
Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, VM ID Codes, Character Message
92
Memory Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, Called ID, ANI,
X
and Call Forward Backup RAM
93
CO Line Identification
X
97
Printing Program Data through SMDR
X
1-6
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
Alphabetical Program Listing
Alphabetical Program Listing
This alphabetical program listing gives you features/topics and the corresponding Strata DK
program numbers that relate to the topic
Ov
erv
i
Feature or Topic
Program Number
ew
Feature or Topic
Program Number
Account Codes
15, 70, 39, 69, 30, 60
Call Pickup
10-1, *15, *31, 39
03, 09, *09, 10-4, 11,
Call Transfer with Camp-on
10-1
14-0, 14-1, *14-1, 14-2, *14-2,
ACD
14-3, 14-4, 14-5, 14-6, 14-8,
03, 10-3, 20, 39, *50, *51, *52,
14-9, 14-71, 14-72, 14-73, 15, 17,
Caller ID
59, 60-1, 77-4, (DK 14 only: 76-1,
18, 35, 39, 71-1~3
76-2)
Add-on Module
*29
Camp-on
10-2, 31, *34, 37
Alarm Sensor
39
Centrex/PBX Compatible
42-0, 42-1~8, *45
All Call Voice Page
05, 10-2, 31, 39
Centrex Ringing Repeat
10-1
Alert Signal
39
CO/Centrex/PBX Feature
39, 42-0, 42-1~8
Buttons
Alternate Point Answer
10-1
CO Line Access
39, 40, 41
Amplified Conference
10-2, 10-3
(External)
CO Line Alpha Identification
93
10-3, 20, 39, *51, *52, 59, 60-1,
CO Line Groups
16
ANI
71-0~5), 72, 77-4
CO Line Reseize Guard Time
10-1, 42-0
Attendant Console
03, 58-1, 58-2, 58-4, 58-5, 59
CO Line Queuing
05, 16
Auto Attendant (Built-in)
09, 10-3, 23~26, 78, 81~89
CO Line Ringing
78, *80, 81~89, *81, *84, *87
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
10-1, 16, 30, 39
Conferencing
10-1, 10-2, 10-3,15
Automatic Callback
05, 39, 10-2
Credit Card Calls (0 + dialing)
43, 60-7
Automatic Hold
35
Data Port/DIU Configuration
20, 21, 22, 39
Automatic Hold Recall
34
10-2, 78, 81~89, *80, *81, *84,
DAY/NIGHT Mode
Automatic PCB Recognition
91
*87
Automatic Preference
32
Delayed Ringing
*80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 88, 89
Automatic Release Hold/VM
Digital Telephone
03, 27, 30, 38, 39, 80, 92-5
15
Port
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
*09, 15, 17, *17, 30, 71, 72
Background Music
05, 10-2, 19, 39
Direct Inward System Access
15, 10-1, 60, 78
Busy Override
05, 31
(DISA)
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing
35
Direct Station Selection
29-1~29-8, 39
Buttons
Cabinet Type Identification
*03
04, *04, *33, 39, 71-(0-3), *71,
Call Blocking (VM Ports)
31
Directory Number
*72, *73, 79, *79, 81-89, *81, *84,
*87
Call Forward Blocking with
35
Handsfree
Directory Number Buttons
39
Call Forward External
05, 12, 15, 41, 60-8
DISA Code Revision
04, 05, 30, 40, 41
Call Forward Station Ring
Distinctive Station Ringing
10-2, 80
(ground/loop start lines)
*80
*04, 33, *40, 71-(0-3), 81-89, *81,
Distributed Hunt
Call Forwarding (all types)
10-2, 36, 39, 40
*84, *87
Call Park Orbits
*05, *37, 39, 58-4, 59
DKi Admin
77-1
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-7

Overview
Alphabetical Program Listing
Feature or Topic
Program Number
Feature or Topic
Program Number
12, 17, 20, 60-1, 71-(0-5), 72,
03, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4, 50-5,
DNIS
77-4
50-6, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55-0, 55-1/2,
HMIS
56, 60-2,
Do Not Disturb
39
60-3, 76-1
Do Not Disturb Override
05, 30
10-1, 10-4, 16, *16, *42-1, *42-2,
*43-1~4, *44, *60, *61, *62, *63,
ISDN
Door Lock Control
39, 77-1, 77-2
*64-1, *64-2, *65, *66-1~7, *67-
1~4, *68-1, *68-2, *69-1, *69-2
Door Phones
05, 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79
Handsfree Answerback
17, 31
DSS Console Features
03, 28, 29-1~29-8, 10-2
Hold/Park Recall Timing
34
DSS DKT/EKT
28
Hunting, Station
10-2, 22, 33
DTMF and Dial Pulse
10-1, 15, 30, 39
Assignments
Immediate Transfer with Soft
10-2
Key
DTMF Receiver (QRCU3,
03, 12, 15
K5RCU, RRCS) Operation
Initialization (system
91-9, 91-1, 90
programs)
DTMF Signal Time, CO lines
10-1
(80/160 ms)
Initialization (system/personal
91-9, 92
memory)
DTMF Signal Time, VM Ports
10-2
(80/160 ms)
Keystrips
38
DTMF Tone/No Tone/Padded
Least Cost Routing
*45-2, *45-3, *45-4, 50~56
10-2
Tone Return
Liquid Crystal Display
10-2, 35, 39
DTMF Continuous Tone
Features
35
(2000-series DKT)
Logical Port Display/Change
01
Emergency Numbers
44-91~93
RAM Memory Test
00 (Part 2)
*11-0, *11-1, *11-2, *11-5, *11-6,
Enhanced 911 (E911)
*11-8, *12, *13
Message Center
13, *32
Exclusive Hold
10-1
Message Waiting/Flash
05, 10-2, 12, 35, 39
Executive Override
05, 10-2, 30
Microphone Control
30, 39
External Page Interface
10-2, 77-1, 77-3, 78
Modem Pool Port Assignment
20, 21
External Zone Paging
05, 77-1, 77-3
Music-on-Hold
77-1
Fixed Call Forwarding
36, 39
Night Pickup Code
05
Flash Key Assignment
39
Night Ringing over External
77-1, 77-3, 78
Page
Flash Timing
12
Night Transfer
29, 39, 59, 77-1, 78
Flexible Access Code
05, *05
Numbering
Night Transfer Lock
*36, 39, 59, 74
Flexible Button Assignments
38, 39
Off-hook Call Announce
03, 30, 31, 39
Flexible Directory Numbering
04, *04, 05, 39
On-hook Dialing
32
Flexible Line Ringing
Outgoing Call Restriction
41
81~89
Assignment
Paging-DKT/EKT (Also see
Flexible PCB Slot
Group Paging and External
31, 39
91-9, 91-1, 03
Configuration
Paging)
Forced and Voluntary Account
Passwords-Remote
15, 30, 60, 39
00
Codes
Programming
Group Paging
05, *30
Pause Timing
12, 39
Group Pickup
*31
PBX Access Code
42-1~42-8
PBX Backup
42-0
1-8
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
Alphabetical Program Listing
Feature or Topic
Program Number
Feature or Topic
Program Number
Physical Port Display/Change
02
T1 Assignments
*41, *42
Pooled CO Lines
16, 39
Tandem CO Line Connections
10-1, 15
Ov
erv
Pooled Line Buttons
16, 39
Tenant Service
*15, *36, 39, 77-3, 74
iew
Pooled Line LED No Flash
31
Tie Lines
03, 04, 15, 17, 30, 37, 71, 72
Port/Station Number
Toll Restriction
10-1, 30, 35, 41~48, *45-1~3
04
Assignment
Toll Restriction Override
10-1
Privacy/Non-Privacy
31, 30, 39
Toll Restriction Override Code
30
Privacy Override
10-2, 30, 31
Revision
RAM Test (see Memory Test)
00 (Part 2)
Toshiba Proprietary VM
03, 10-2, 13, *32
Interface
Redial Last Number
39
Transfer Privacy
10-1
Remote Administration and
00, 03, *09, 77-1, 78
Maintenance
Traveling Class
44-1~8
Repeat Last Number Dialed
39
Traveling Class Code Revision
30
Ring Transfer
10-1, 37
Verifiable Account Codes
15, 30, 39, 60, 69, 70
Ringing Repeat
10-1
Verifiable Account Codes
30
Revision
Ring Tones
80
Voice Mail Interface
10-2, 31, 33, 39
Ring Flash Assignments
*71~*73, 81~89, *81, *84, *87
Voice or Tone Signaling
05, 10-1, 10-2
Ringing Line Preference
32, 81~89
Volume Reset (Digital
92-5
03, (41, 42, 43, 49), 20, 76, 77-1,
Telephones)
RS-232 Interface
77-4
Volume Set (Digital
27
Saved Number Redial
39
Telephones)
Security Code (CF-EXT.)
60-8
Voluntary Account Codes
39
Security Code (DISA)
05, 30, 60-6
Security Code (R.
00
Maintenance)
Slot Assignment
03
Software Version
00
Speakerphone Assignment
30
Speed Dial
10-1, 30, 39
Speed Dial Clear
92
Speed Dial Entry Timeout
10-3
Standard Telephone Options
10-2, 30, *34, 35
Station Class of Service
30, 31, *34, 35
Station Hunting (Data Calls)
22
Station Hunting (Voice Calls)
33
Station Message Detail
03, 60-1~60-7, 76, 97
Recording (SMDR)
Station-to-Station Volume
10-1
03, 10-2, 10-3, 13, 31, *32, *40,
SMDI VM Interface
76
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-9

Overview
How to Program a Strata DK System
How to Program a Strata DK System
Fill out the record sheets that are provided, then enter this data using a 20-button LCD digital
(DKT) or electronic (EKT) telephone. Strata DK enables you to enter data from an on-site or off-
site PC with Toshiba DKi Admin software. Toshiba highly recommends this easier method of
programming.
DK14/DK40i: the programming telephone must be any 20-button LCD DKT (or EKT, DK40i
only). The DKT must be connected to a Base KSU, PDKU, RDSU, QCDU, or KCDU digital port.
An EKT must be connected to a PEKU port.
DK424 and DK424i: the programming telephone must be a 20-button LCD DKT or EKT
connected to circuit 6 of a PDKU or PEKU installed in cabinet slot 11 and/or slot 12.
Note
Telephones connected to an RDSU or PESU cannot be used to program DK424 or
DK424i.
Programming Section Layout
Each programming section within a chapter begins with the program's number and title, followed
by processor and program type, initialized default, program sequence, then record sheets. A
program overview and additional program information are given after the record sheets
(see Figure 1-1).
Note
Some common program sections also include examples for your convenience.
System Programs
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Program Overview
Program 30 Overview
Program 30 enables or disables features for individual telephones at the station level. The following
Brief description of program
text describes Program 30 LEDs.
Privacy Override, LED 19
Additional Program
function(s).
With Privacy Override enabled (LED 19 ON), a station can override calls and listen to a CO line
Information
conversation by pressing a common CO line button (not a [DN] button). You can set a warning tone
for Privacy Override (see Program 10-2).
Additional details on the program
features that were given on the
System Programs
system record sheet.
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Number/Title
Program 30
Station Class of Service
Processor Type
Processor Type: DK14/DK40/DK424
Program Type: System
Gives the type of processor that is
Initialized Default: LEDs 01, 05 and 07 for all ports
compatible with the given program.
Program Sequence
Be sure to read this information
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
Buttons/LEDs
Light LEDs for the port specified in the
Keystrokes for entering data
last step. All LEDs marked with an "X"
before attempting to use a program
in the table below should be lit.
from system record sheets
with your system application.
follow a pattern, consisting of a
Feature
LED
Port
20
five-step process described and
Program Type
19
18
illustrated in "Program
17
Type of function the program
16
Sequence" on Page 1-13.
15
performs. Can be: Initialization,
14
13
Test System, Station, Toll
12
11
Record Sheet
Restriction or Least Cost Routing.
10
09
08
Provides a list of available
07
Initialized Default
06
features. The sheet is used to
05
record the assignment of
Default configuration set by
features or the operation of each
Program 91-9 "System
2174
program. Each sheet provides
Initialization" when the system is
space to record data. This data
first installed or re-initialized.
will be referred to when
programming the system.
Figure 1-1
System Record Sheet Sample
1-10
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
How to Program a Strata DK System
Program Sequence
Detailed data entry instructions are on the top of each record sheet (see Figure 1-2).
Ov
To use the program sequence on the record sheet
erv
1. From the programming telephone, enter the programming mode by pressing a series of shaded
iew
buttons. The shaded buttons represent the entry sequence for all programs.
2. Enter the program number. This sequence is unique for every program. The buttons are white
on every record sheet.
3. Enter the program data. Again, this sequence is unique for every program. The buttons are
white on every record sheet. To make another entry, repeat this step until ready to exit the
current program.
4. Exit the current program. This sequence never changes, and the buttons are always shaded.
Upon exiting the current program, repeat Step 2 to enter another program, or continue with
Step 5 to exit the programming mode entirely.
5. Exit the programming mode by pressing the same button sequence as in Step 4. This sequence
also never changes and is always shaded.
Another Program
More Data
Step 1
Step 3
Enter Program Mode
Enter Program Data
(Do not press or [DN] button)

Step 4
Step 2
Exit Current Program
Enter Program Number
Step 5
Exit Program Mode
or
(LED Buttons)
and/or
1697
Figure 1-2
Programming Button Sequence Overview
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-11

Overview
How to Program a Strata DK System
Programming Data Variations
There are two different ways to enter data in Step 3 (Figure 1-2) of a program: pressing the buttons
on the dial pad and pressing the LED buttons. Many programs are multidimensional and involve
both types of entry.
Simple Programs
Simple programs such as Program 00, only require data to be specified through the dial pad. Data
entered from the dial pad displays on the programming digital or electronic telephone's LCD,
along with prompts and confirmations.
Multidimensional Programs
Once a program number is entered, the first dimension (usually a CO line number, a station port
number, or a range of ports) must be specified. Upon specifying this first dimension on the dial
pad, programming button LEDs 01~20 light in the default configuration.
The status of each LED can be changed by pressing its associated button. Pressing the button while
its LED is lit turns the LED Off; pressing the button while its LED is Off turns the LED On. An
example of multidimensional programming is Program 30.
Range Programming
Data can be entered for a range of stations, [DN] reference ports and CO lines with some
programs.
To enter a range
Enter a " " between the starting point of a range and the ending point of a range.
For example, to program the station range of 001~010 for Program 35, press .
When programming a range of station ports, the station's programming LEDs indicate
whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range:
LED On: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that
lights the particular LED.
LED Off: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that
does not light the particular LED.
LED Flashing: Indicates that data is currently inconsistent for all ports in the range. Some
may be programmed with the LED On; some with the LED Off.
CO Line Programming
Since the programming telephone only has 20 buttons, data can only be entered for 20 CO lines at
a time.
To program another range
Press the 3DJH or 6FUROO button below the LCD.
For example, to change from one range to another in Program 15, enter the program code, then
press 6FUROO to advance or 3DJH to go back to another range.
If the programming telephone is a digital telephone, all CO lines within a range can be
activated or deactivated for a feature by pressing the 9RO
/9RO buttons.
Press 9RO to turn all LEDs On; press 9RO button to turn all LEDs Off.
1-12
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
How to Program a Strata DK System
To check the status of a CO line in Program 15
1. Press the 0RGH button (below the LCD) after entering the program code.
2. Then enter the CO line number to be verified.
Ov
erv
3. Press to display the status of the CO line and to advance to the next CO line.
iew
Programming LED Buttons Keystrip Template
You place a special buttonstrip template (see Figure 1-3) over the 20 flexible feature buttons of the
programming telephone. The template assigns a series of numbers to each of the 20 buttons that
correspond with tables found on the record sheets for programming purposes.
Since each button represents more than one CO line, depending on the CO line range selected, the
template assigns more than one number to each button.
10
9 20
9
30, 50, 70
40, 60, 80
16, 36, 56, 76
17, 37, 57, 77
18, 38, 58, 78
19, 39, 59, 79
20, 40, 60, 80
90, 110, 130,
100, 120, 140,
96, 116, 136,
97, 117, 137,
98, 118, 138,
99, 119, 139,
100, 120, 140,
150, 170, 190
160, 180, 200
156, 176, 196
157, 177, 197
158, 178, 198
159, 179, 199
160, 180, 200
11, 31, 51, 71
12, 32, 52, 72
13, 33, 53, 73
14, 34, 54, 74
15, 35, 55, 75
09
8 19
8
29, 49, 69
39, 59, 79
91, 111, 131,
92 112, 132,
93, 113, 133,
94, 114, 134,
95, 115, 135,
89, 109, 129,
99, 119, 139,
151, 171, 191
152, 172, 192
153, 173, 193
154, 174, 194
155, 175, 195
149, 169, 189
159, 179, 199
06, 26, 46, 66
07, 27, 47, 67
08, 28, 48, 68
09, 29, 49, 69
10, 30, 50, 70
08
7 18
7
86, 106, 126,
87, 107, 127,
88, 108, 128,
89, 109, 129,
90, 110, 130,
28, 48, 68
38, 58, 78
146, 166, 186
147, 167, 187
148, 168, 188
149, 169, 189
150, 170, 190
88, 108, 128,
98, 118, 138,
148, 168, 188
158, 178, 198
01, 21, 41, 61
02, 22, 42, 62
03, 23, 43, 63
04, 24, 44, 64
05, 25, 45, 65
81, 101, 121,
82, 102, 122,
83, 103, 123,
84, 104, 124,
85, 105, 125,
07
6 17
6
27, 47, 67
37, 57, 77
141, 161, 181
142, 162, 182
143, 163, 183
144, 164, 184
145, 165, 185
87, 107, 127,
97, 117, 137,
1843
147, 167, 187
157, 177, 197
06
5 16
5
26, 46, 66
36, 56, 76
1000-series digital telephone strip - shows programming button/LED
86, 106, 126,
96, 116, 136,
assignment locations. Shown as reference only - not available as an
146, 166, 186
156, 176, 196
individual strip.
05
4 15
4
25, 45, 65
35, 55, 75
85, 105, 125,
95, 115, 135,
145, 165, 185
155, 175, 195
04
3 14
3
LED Buttons and CO line numbers (01~20)
24, 44, 64
34, 54, 74
84, 104, 124,
94, 114, 134,
144, 164, 184
154, 174, 194
03
2 13
2
Last digit of EK port number for
23, 43, 63
33, 53, 73
programs with a format like
83, 103, 123,
93, 113, 133,
*71, *72, and *73
143, 163, 183
153, 173, 193
02
1 12
1
22, 42, 62
32, 52, 72
82, 102, 122,
92, 112, 132,
CO line numbers (21~200)
142, 162, 182
152, 172, 192
01
0 11
0
21, 41, 61
31, 51, 71
2000-series digital telephone strip - supplied with each Strata DK
81, 101, 121,
91, 111, 131,
Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the
141, 161, 181
151, 171, 191
system. Can also be used with 6000- and 6500-series electronic telephones.
Figure 1-3
LED Buttons Programming Keystrips
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-13

Overview
First-time Programming
First-time Programming
Follow these general procedures the first time you install a system or after major hardware changes
and/or you need to start from scratch.
Step 1: Check Minimum Hardware Requirements
A system must have the following minimum hardware installed for programming, as described in
the Installation chapters of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.
To check hardware requirements on the DK14 and DK40i
1. Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional.
2. Make sure a 20-button digital LCD DKT telephone (equipped with a programming template)
is connected to any digital telephone circuit (Base KSU, PDKU, QCDU, KCDU or RDSU
digital port); or make sure that a 20-button electronic LCD EKT telephone is connected to a
PEKU electronic port (not PESU).
DK14 and DK40i: make sure the Base KSU's BATT jumper is in the On position.
To check hardware requirements on the DK424 and DK424i
1. Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional.
2. If using an RCTUE/F, remove the small jumper PCB (MBJU) from the front side of the
DK424 base unit backplane (between slot R11 and the RCTU slot. All other RCTUs require
the MBJU PCB. This does not apply to DK424i.
3. Make sure an that the BATT jumper is in the On position for all processors.
4. Make sure a PDKU or PEKU, is installed in the first slot of the in the base cabinet (S11 or
S101) if RSIU is not installed, or if RSIU is installed in S12 or S102).
5. Make sure a 20-button LCD DKT or EKT telephone (equipped with programming template) is
connected to physical port 005 and/or port 013 (PDKU or PEKU - circuit 6/slot 11or 101 and/
or circuit 6/slot 12 or 102). Do not use RDSU or PESU in the programming telephone slot.
Step 2: Initialize the System
1. From a 20-button LCD programming telephone, or from DKi Admin on a PC, run Program
919 twice in succession to initialize the system. At this point it is not necessary that all PCBs
are installed. However, if they are, Program 03 codes are automatically assigned to the
appropriate slots.
CAUTION!
If you run Program 91-9 while the system is in service, all program data is
erased and all calls are dropped.
Program 91-9 sets the following elements to initial default status:
Data for Programs 00~*99
Speed Dial Memory
Logical/Physical Port Locations
Voice Mail Identification Codes
Character Message Memory
1-14
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Overview
First-time Programming
Timed Reminders
Digital Telephone Volume Levels
Call Forward Memory (Power Off, then On).
Ov
Station Message Waiting Status
erv
Caller ID Lost Call Memory
iew
2. Install all PCBs. Run Program 91-1 to inform the software of the system hardware
configuration.
Step 3: Run Programs 03 and 19-1
1. Run Program 03 for all PCBs that have options.
2. Run Program 19-1 to inform the software of the system option Alternate BGM slot.
Step 4: Run Program 00
Run Program 00 - Part 1 to assign remote maintenance security codes. Run Program 00 - Part
2 to test the processor and RAM.
Step 5: Set Date, Time and Day
You can set date, time and day anytime - individually or all.
1. Use DKT or EKT assigned to logical Port 000 or attendant console.
2. Make sure the handset is on-hook.
3. Set the date:
[PDN]

5HGLDO
Date in year/month/day format
(YYMMDD). If month or day is
single digit, precede with a zero.
4. Set the time:
[PDN]

5HGLDO
Time in hours/minutes/seconds format (HHMMSS
from 000000 to 235959). If any of these values is
single digit, precede with a zero.
5. Set the day:
[PDN]

5HGLDO
Enter the digit for today's day:
= Sunday
= Monday
= Tuesday
= Wednesday
= Thursday
= Friday
= Saturday
Step 6: Run Additional Programs as Required
Strata DK Programming 5/00
1-15

Overview
Programming Examples
Programming Examples
Some commonly used programs have explicit examples (listed below). Refer to these pages to
help familiarize you with running these programs.
Program
Page
Program 91-9 -- System Initialization
2-3
Program 90 -- Initializing Programs 00~*99
2-5
Program 91-1-- Automatic PCB Recognition and Logical/Physical Port Initialization
2-2
Program 92 -- Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, VM ID Codes, Character Message Memory,
2-9
Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, and Call Forward Backup Memory
Program 00 -- Software Check
2-12
3-3,
Program 03 -- DK14 Slot Assignments and DK40i/DK424 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments
3-4,
3-6
Program 04 -- Station Logical Port Primary Directory Intercom or Number Assignment
3-17
Program 30 -- Station Class of Service
3-80
Program 33 -- Station Hunting
3-93
1-16
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
2
This chapter gives you information on the Strata DK's Initialization and Test programs. The
programs in this chapter are not given in numerical order, rather in order of importance. These
programs include:
Initiali
Program 91-9  System Initialization
zation & T
Program 90  Initialize Programs 00~99
Program 91-1  Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber
Program 91-2  Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory
est
Program 92  Initializing Misc. Backup RAM
Program 00  Part 1: Software Check
Program 00  Part 2: RCTU RAM Test
Examples are also given for these programs - except Programs 91-2 and Program 00 - Part 2.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-1

Initialization & Test
Program 91-9 System Initialization
Program 91-9 System Initialization
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Initialization
Initialized Default: See individual programs
Repeat a second time after LEDs 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 extinguish.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG Program Telephone Exits Program Mode
Enter programming mode.
Press Buttons 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09.
(Do not press [DN] button.)
LEDs 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 must be On.
LCD Displays:
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Program 91-9 Overview
Note
Always run Program 91-9 before entering the customer database when first installing a
system or when its software must be set to the default configuration, but not while system
is in service.
CAUTION!
If you run Program 91-9 while the system is in service, it will erase all program
data and drop all calls.
Running Program 91-9 also runs Program 03 and assigns codes to all PCBs (except options)
installed. It also erases all Program 03 option codes for piggyback PCBs, DSS consoles, RRCS,
etc., except the RCOS PCB Code (17).
Program 91-9 erases all random or programmed data in all Strata DK software programs and sets
all program data to the default value. It automatically runs all other initialization Programs 90-
00~ 99, 91-1, and 92-1~9. It also brings back logical and physical ports to their initialized
settings.
If you are installing the system processor(s) for the first time, after initializing the system, test the
RAM: run Program 00 Part 2.
CAUTION!
Running Program 00 Part 2 drops all calls in progress and interrupts telephone
service for 15 seconds. This test will not erase programmed customer data.
Important!
Do not use Program 91-9 if you are only making minor programming changes and
system programming is basically correct.
Note
Run Program 03 after Program 91-9 for: PCBs with options such as Dual-tone
Multi-frequency Receivers K5RCU, QRCU3, RRCS, BRCS, and DSS consoles, etc.
...or if entering a customer database into system RAM memory before other system PCBs
(stations, lines, options) are installed. Program 03 identifies which universal and option
PCBs (e.g., RRCS, BRCS, etc.) are to be installed in each cabinet slot.
2-2
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 91-9 System Initialization
Program 91-9 Example
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See
No. N-N1
"Programming Examples" on Page 1-16.)
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 91
Access Program 91. System beeps after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed
Data Store
to indicate program number may be entered.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
91 Select =
Prepare the system for a station port selection.
Initiali
5.
Press
System Initialization
zation & T
6.
Press LED Buttons 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 (LEDs turn On)
System Initialization
7.
Press +ROG
No. N-N
The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01,
(Month Day Time)
est
03, 05, 07, and 09 will go out after a short delay. Make sure all LEDs
go out before proceeding to Step 8.
No. N-N
8.
Repeat Steps 1~7 a second time.
(Month Day Time)
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-3

Initialization & Test
Program 90 Initialize Programs 00~*99
Program 90 Initialize Programs 00~*99
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Initialization
Initialized Default: See individual programs

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter programming
Programs to be initialized. Add
End Program 90
Exit programming mode
mode
a range of program numbers
by entering XX*XX or XX**XX.
LEDs 01 and 02 must flash
Press LED Buttons 01 and 02
LEDs 01 and 02 must be On
Program 90 Overview
Program 90 enables you to clear all customer data and initialize individual programs or range of
programs.
Important!
When installing the system, you must run Program 91-9 which runs Program 90
(before running any other program); if you do not, the system could begin to operate
erratically.
Notes
Running Program 91-9, automatically runs Program 90.
To initialize all programs without dropping calls or erasing user names, speed dial numbers,
voice mail ID codes, etc., enter as "Programs to be initialized."
Each "*" program record sheet immediately follows the program record sheet having the same
number (example: *31 follows 31 record sheet). However, in system memory all "*" programs
follow Program 99. Therefore, "*" program ranges must be initialized separately from non-
star programs unless initializing all system Programs (00**99).
For example, to initialize Programs 30, *30, 31, *31, and 32: initialize the range (30*32), for
Programs 30, 31, 32; and the range (*30**31), for Programs *30 and *31.
If you are installing the system for the first time, run Program 91-9 to erase random data from
RAM (caused by battery jumper movement to the internal battery). You can then skip Program
90, since Program 91-9 automatically runs Program 90.
2-4
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 90 Initialize Programs 00~*99
Program 90 Example
Action
LCD Response
1.
Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware
No. N-N1
Requirements on Page 1-14.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.
Enter Program mode by pressing . (Do not press [DN]
Program Mode
button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 90
Access Program 90. System beeps after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed
Data Store
to indicate program number may be entered.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
90 Select =
Initiali
Prepare the system for the programs to be initialized.
5.
+ LED buttons 01 & 02
90 Select = 00**99
zation & T
Enter Program numbers individually, followed by #, or in a range. For a
Data Clr
range, separate the low program number and the high program
number with an asterisk.
initializes all Programs 00~ 99.
est
Star Program memory follows Program 97.
6.
+ROG
90 Select = 00**99
Secure data in system programming. LEDs 01 and 02 flash.
Data Programmed
7.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
90 Select =
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit
Program 90 (continue with Step 8).
8.
+ROG
90 Select = ##
Secure default data in system memory. LED 01 and 02 continue to
Data Programmed
flash.
9.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 90. Enter another program number (see "Program 92
Example" on Page 2-10) or exit programming mode (go to Step 10).
System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 90.
10.
+ROG
No. N-N
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
The system will not allow the 6SNU 6SHDNHU LED to light to re-
enter the programming mode.
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-5

Initialization & Test
Program 91-1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber
Program 91-1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port
Renumber
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Initialization
Initialized Default: None

6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG Program Telephone Exits Program Mode
Enter programming mode.
Press LED Buttons 01 and 02.
(Do not press [DN] button.)
LEDs 01 and 02 must be On.
LCD Displays:91 SELECT = 1
Renumber and Reset
Program 91-1 Overview
Program 91-1 makes slot code assignments to installed PCBs that do not have options - such as a
PDKU without a Data Interface Unit or Off-hook Call Announce (OCA), the common control
without a Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver (RRCS), K5RCU, QRCU3, etc.
Program 91-1 also sets physical and logical ports to their initialized settings - even if you
previously relocated them. (See Program 01 and 02 for initialized settings.). Programs 04, 04, 05,
05, 09, or 71 are not affected.
CAUTION!
Running Program 91-1 drops all calls.
Important!
To identify Program 03 PCB slot codes, run Program 91-1 after you install all
PCBs.
Notes
You can run Program 91-1 after setting PCB option codes with Program 03; this does not erase
option codes. For example, if Slot 00 is assigned code 92, Program 91-1 will not erase the
codes previously assigned with Program 03.
If you install PCBs before initializing the system with Program 91-9, it is not necessary to run
Program 91-1 to assign the Program 03 PCB slot codes for the installed PCBs. You must
always run Program 03 to identify PCB options such as K5RCU, QRCU3, and RRCS codes
92, 93 and 94 and PDKU codes 61, 62, and 64, etc.
2-6
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 91-1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber
Program 91-1 Example
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware
No. N-N1
Requirements on Page 1-14.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 91
Access Program 91. System beeps after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed
Data Store
to indicate program number may be entered.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
91 Select =
Initiali
Prepare the system for a station port selection.
zation & T
5.
Press
91 Select = 1
Renumber and Reset
91 Select = 1
6.
Press LED Buttons 01 and 02 (LEDs turn On)
Renumber and Reset
est
7.
Press +ROG
No. N-N
The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01
(Month Day Time)
and 02 will go out after a short delay.
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-7

Initialization & Test
Program 91-2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory
Program 91-2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory
to Working Memory
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Initialization
Initialized Default: See individual programs

6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG Program Telephone Exits Program Mode and Transfers Data
Enter programming mode.
Press LED Buttons 03 and 04.
(Do not press [DN] button.)
LEDs 03 and 04 must be On.
LCD Displays:91 SELECT = 2
Programming
Taking Effect
Program 91-2 Overview
Program 91-2 simulates turning system power Off for five seconds then On to transfer data from
temporary memory to working memory.
This power Off / power On sequence is required when programming with a telephone or when
using DKi Admin/DKi Backup. In these cases Program 03, 41-2, 50 and 76-1 data must be
transferred from temporary to working memory.
Program 91-2 does not change or erase any programmed data including directory numbers set in
Program 04 and *04 or logical/physical port assignments in Program 01 and 02.
CAUTION!
Running Program 91-2 drops all calls and renders the system inoperative for
up to eight seconds.
2-8
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 92 Initializing Misc. Backup RAM
Program 92 Initializing Misc. Backup RAM
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Initialization - Includes: Initializing Speed Dial Number, VM ID Codes, Character
Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, Called ID, ANI, and
Call Forward Backup RAM
Initialized Default: See individual programs
Clear more data

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter programming
SELECT = Press appropriate
End Program 92.
Exit programming
Initiali
mode.
buttons as shown below.
mode.
zation & T
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID Codes, and LCD memos
assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers.
est
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to System Speed
Dial numbers.
Clears Character Message Memory (Station and System) and User
Name/Number Display.
Clears Timed Reminders.
Resets digital telephone volume levels to initialized settings, specifically,
speaker volume levels for Internal Calls [DN], Tone/BGM, Busy Override
(muted ring), and Ring volume to approximately mid-range on all DKTs.
Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume
levels. Use Program 27 to set off-hook digital telephone handset
receiver volume levels.

+ROG
Power Off 5
Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting Memory
seconds; then
(all stations). Program 92-9 does not affect Call
Power On
Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings.
Program 92 Overview
Program 92 clears all previously entered or random data (of the type listed) but does not clear data
in system Programs 00~ 99.
CAUTION!
You must run Program 92 when first installing the system or an RCTU; if you
do not, the system could begin to operate erratically.
Running Program 91-9 automatically runs Program 92 (1~9) to erase customer
data.
Notes
Running Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels. Use
Program 27 to set off-hook handset receiver volume levels for digital telephones.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-9

Initialization & Test
Program 92 Initializing Misc. Backup RAM
Program 92-9 does not affect Call Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings.
You must power the system Off then back On to clear telephone LCD Call Forward Displays
and Call Forward button LEDs. Call Forward memory is cleared when you run Program 92-9,
even if system power is not cycled.
Program 92 Example
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See "Step
No. N-N1
1: Check Minimum Hardware Requirements" on Page 1-14.)
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.) System beeps
after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed to indicate program number may
be entered.
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 92
Access Program 92.
Data Store
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
92 Select =
Prepare the system for selection of programs to initialize. For new
system installation perform all 1~4.
5.
Select one of the following.
92 Select = 1
+ LED Buttons 01 & 03
Each Dial Clr
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID codes, and LCD memos
assigned to station speed dial numbers.
or...
92 Select = 2
+ LED Buttons 01 & 04
Common Dial Clr
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to system
speed dial numbers.
or...
92 Select = 3
+ LED Buttons 02 & 03
Msg Clr
Clears Character Message Memory (station and system) and user
name display.
or...
92 Select = 4
+ LED Buttons 02 & 04
Tmr Reminder Clr
Clears timed reminders.
or...
92 Select = 5
+ LED Buttons 01 & 05
DKT VR Initial
Presets the Ring, Speaker, Mute Ring, and Intercom Tone, BGM,
volume levels of all digital telephones to approximately mid-range.
or...
92 Select = 9
+ LED Buttons 03 & 04
Back Up RAM Clr
Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting (R3) Memory except Fixed
Call Forward Memory.
6.
+ROG
92 Select = (1~0)
LEDs lit in Step 5 turn off to secure data in system programming.
Data Programmed
Repeat Steps 4~6 until Step is completed.
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].
2-10
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 92 Initializing Misc. Backup RAM
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
7.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
92 Select =
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit
Program 92 (continue with Step 8).
8.
+ROG
92 Select = ##
Initialized data in system memory (LEDs got out).
Data Programmed
9.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 92. Enter another program number (see "Program 30
Station Class of Service" on Page 3-76) or exit programming mode (go
to Step 10). System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 92.
10.
+ROG
No. N-N
Initiali
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
zation & T
est
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-11

Initialization & Test
Program 00 Part 1: Software Check
Program 00 Part 1: Software Check
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Test - Includes: Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments
Initialized Default: None

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Select = Code
Password Codes (4 digits)
Select =
Password or S/W
Item
LCD Display
Code
Check Codes
Ver =
0
ROM Version (not programmable)
(See tables below)
1
1st Level Password
Password =
2
2nd Level Password
Password =
8
Software RAM Checksum (not programmable)
Sum =
9
Power Cycle Counter (not programmable)
Counter =
V E R =
- K E Y X
DKT LCD Display
X = 1, 2, or 3
(see table below)
ROM Version
(If RKYS, KKYS,
or QKYS is installed)
4994
DKT LCD Display
Processor Type
DKT LCD Display
Processor Type
QMA
DK8
RAA4X
RCTUA4
PSSA
DK16
RBA4X
RCTUBA4/BB4
WMA4
DK14
RCA4X
RCTUC4/D4
TMA4
DK16e, DK40, DK40i
REA4X
RCTUE4/F4
RAA
RCTUA R1/R2
B1A4X
B1CU
RBA
RCTUB R1/R2
B2A4X
B2CAU/BU
RCA
RCTUC R1/R2
B3A4X
B3CAU/BU
RAA3X
RCTUA3
B5A4X
B5CAU/BU
RBA3X
RCTUBA3/RCTUBB3
RCA3X
RCTUC3/D3
REA3X
RCTUE4/F4
Key Type
Description
KEY 1
RKYS1, KKYS1, or QKYS installed. Built-in Auto Attendant software.
KEY 2
AA and ACD software. RKYS2, KKYS2 installed.
KEY 3
RKYS3, KKYS3 installed. ACD/MIS and AA installed.
2-12
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 00 Part 1: Software Check
Program 00 Part 1 - Overview
This program enables you to run various checks on the Strata DK System.
DK14: the QKYS feature key must be installed on the QRCU3 PCB to allow AA.
DK40i: the KKYS feature key must be installed on the K5RCU PCB to allow AA.
DK424 and DK424i: the RKYS feature key must be installed on the RCTU or BCU to allow AA,
ACD, and ACD/MIS.
Code 0, ROM Version
Code 0 displays the software version of the system processor PCB or on the DK40i Base KSU, or
DK14 KSU, and if installed, the RKYS, KKYS, or QKYS key type. See the Program 00 Record
Initiali
Sheet for an illustration of software displays. This information cannot be altered with this program.
zation & T
Code 1, Level 1 Security Code
Use to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to all programs and data.
e
Code 2, Level 2 Security Code
st
Use this program to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to Programs
30~39, 77~89, and 30~ 31.
Important!
When using a DKi Admin PC, either Security Code (1 or 2) enables the DKi Admin
user full access to all Strata DK programs. Always change Security Code 1 and
Code 2 to prevent unauthorized programming changes by DKi Admin users that
may try to log-in remotely with the default security code: 0000.
Code 8, Software RAM Checksum and Code 9, Power Off Counter
For factory purposes only.
Program 00 Part 1 - Example
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See "First-
No. N-N1
time Programming" on Page 1-14.)
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 00
Speaker beeps to indicate when to enter program number. Access
Data Store
Program 00.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
00 Select =
Prepare system for a selection.
5.
Select one of the following attributes:
00 Select = 0

RNAXNN-Key X
View the software version. This attribute can not be edited.
Note
NN = The actual version
number and letter. See Program
or...
00 record sheet for details).
X = 1, 2, or 3.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-13

Initialization & Test
Program 00 Part 1: Software Check
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)
LCD Response
1111
00 Select = 1
Define the Level 1 remote maintenance security code from the System
Password = 0000
Record Sheet (four digits maximum). Level 1 allows remote access to
all programs and data. Default Level 1 security code is "0000."
or...
1111
00 Select = 2
Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security code from the System
Password = 0000
Record Sheet (four digits maximum). Level 2 allows remote access to
programs 30~39 and 77~89 only. Default Level 2 security code is
"0000."
or...

00 Select = 8
View the software RAM Checksum. This attribute can not be edited.
Sum = XXXXXXXXX
The default checksum may change.
or...

00 Select = 9
View the RPSU Power Cycle Counter. This attribute can not be edited.
Counter = XXXX
The counter indicates the number of times power is removed from the
system after Program 00 was initialized via Program 90 or 91-9.
6.
+ROG
00 Select = (0,1,2,8, or 9)
Secure data in system programming. (Only works for "1" and "2")
Data Programmed
7.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
00 Select =
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit
Program 00 (continue with Step 8).
8.
+ROG
00 Select = ##
Secure Program 00 data in system memory.
Data Programmed
9.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 00. Enter another program number (see "Program 91-1
Example" on Page 2-7) or exit programming mode (go to Step 10).
System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 00.
10.
+ROG
No. N-N
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:58
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].
2-14
Strata DK Programming 5/00

Initialization & Test
Program 00 Part 2: Processor RAM Test
Program 00 Part 2: Processor RAM Test
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Test - Includes: Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments
Initialized Default: None
General RAM Test
Note
See "Program 00 Part 2 - Overview" on Page 2-16.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG Tests RAM (15 seconds downtime)
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:
Initiali
GENERAL RAM TEST
zation & T
Display General RAM Test Results

6SNU +ROG 6SNU Programming Telephone LCD Displays:
est
DK424
DK14/DK40i
TEST 1 X=OK Y=OK
TEST 1 =OK
or...
or...
TEST 1 X=NG Y=NG
TEST 1 =NG
X=00000 X=00000
Where:
X
=
RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC, B1CU, B2CAU, B3CAU, B5CAU
Y
=
RCTUD3, RCTUF, B2CBU, B3CBU, B5CBU
OK = RAM is good
NG = RAM is defective
An X=NG or Y=NG RAM test result indicates a defective processor PCB;
change the appropriate (X or Y) processor PCB and retest RAM on the
newly installed processor PCB.
Replace the DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1=NG.
Backup RAM Test

6SNU +ROG 6SNU + ROG RCTU Tests RAM (15 seconds downtime)
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:
BACKUP RAM TEST
Strata DK Programming 5/00
2-15

Initialization & Test
Program 00 Part 2: Processor RAM Test
Display Backup RAM Test Results

6SNU +ROG 6SNU Programming Telephone LCD Displays:
DK424
DK14/DK40i
TEST 2 X=OK Y=OK
TEST 1 =OK
or...
or...
TEST 2 X=NG Y=NG
TEST 2 =NG
X=00000 X=00000
Where:
X
=
RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC, B1CU, B2CAU, B3CAU, B5CAU
Y
=
RCTUD3, RCTUF, B2CBU, B3BU, B5CBU
OK = RAM is good
NG = RAM is defective
An X=NG or Y=NG RAM test result indicates a defective RCTU PCB; change
the appropriate (X or Y) processor PCB and retest RAM on the newly
installed processor PCB.
Replace the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1=NG.
Program 00 Part 2 - Overview
Use this program to test the RAM on system processor. If a RAM test error occurs during this test,
the processor causing the error should be replaced. In the case of two-PCB processors, isolation of
a RAM failure is indicated on the programming telephone X or Y (see above).
If the DK14 or DK40i processor fails the RAM test, the Base KSU must be replaced.
CAUTION!
Running each RAM test drops all calls and interrupts telephone service for 15
seconds.
Note
Running Program 00 RAM tests do not change or erase any customer data.
2-16
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
3
This chapter gives you programming information for the Strata DK system and its stations.
Program 01 Station Logical Port Display and/or
Change
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Logical port number = physical port number
Program 90, 91-1, or 91-9 initializes Program 01
To Save existing Logical Port
6SNU
System & Station

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Physical Port Number
The logical port number associated with
Enter new Logical Port
the physical port displays after the
to change existing Logical Port
physical port number is entered.
Processor
[PDN] Port Range
Processor
[PDN] Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Program 01 Overview
Program 01 enables you to enter a physical port to display the associated logical port. You then
have the option to assign a new logical port to the physical port. (To return ports to their initialized
settings, see Programs 90 and 91.)
Note
Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-1

System & Station
Program 02 Station Physical Port Display and/or Change
Program 02 Station Physical Port Display and/or
Change
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Logical port number = physical port number
Program 90, 91-1, or 91-9 initializes Program 02
To Save existing Physical Port
6SNU

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Logical Port Number
The physical port number associated
Enter new Physical Port
with the logical telephone port displays
to change existing Physical Port
after the logical port number is entered.
Processor
[PDN] Port Range
Processor
[PDN] Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Program 02 Overview
Program 02 enables you to enter a logical port to display the associated physical port. You then
have the option to assign a new physical port to the logical port. (To return ports to their initialized
settings, see Programs 90 and 91.)
Notes
Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet.
The system allows only like ports to be reassigned (see below).
Allowed
Not Allowed
Attendant Console (DK424, DK424i only),
Digital-to-Digital Ports (KCDU-QCDU-PDKU-
DSS, BGM or Amplified Conference Ports
PDKU-RDSU Ports)
should not be reassigned
Electronic-to-Electronic Ports (PEKU-PEKU-
Door Phone Ports (004, 012, 020, 028) should
PESU Ports)
not be reassigned
Tie/DID Line Ports should not be reassigned
Standard Tel to Standard Tel Ports (QSTU-
PDKU to PEKU cannot be exchanged
KSTU-PSTU-RSTU-PESU-RDSU/RSTS)
PSTU to PDKU cannot be exchanged
PEKU to PSTU cannot be exchanged
RCIU/RCIS circuit assignments to CO lines are not affected by Program 01 and 02.
3-2
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 03 for DK14 Slot Assignments
Program 03 for DK14 Slot Assignments
When DK14 is powered On, Program 03 automatically assigns the correct codes for installed
PCBs. No record sheet is needed. Refer to the following table for PCB slot and slot code
information:
DK14 Base KSU
COU
WMAU
DKU
QSTU2
None
and QCDU2
Slot Number
00
11
12
13
14
PCB Code
91 or 92
62
11
00 or 31
00
PCB Type
QRCU3
Options
OCA/DIU
Station Numbers
000~007
008~009
CO Line
001~004
Numbers
Notes
In the DK14 software: QCDU2 digital ports are considered to be installed in slot 11. QCDU2
CO lines are considered to be installed in slot 12.
System & Station
opt=QRCU3
opt=Always assigns 8 ports (000~007), digital ports (OCA/DIU). No DSS allowed.
Always assigns 4 CO lines
Always assigns 2 ports (008, 009) standard telephone ports
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-3

System & Station
Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments
Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments
Processor Type:
DK40i
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Program 91-1 or Program 91-9
Code 00 for empty slots (15~18), Base KSU has codes for PCBs
more codes

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On
...or
SELECT = Slot Number (00, 11~18)
CARD = PCB Code (See Reference Table)
Run Program 91-2
DK40i Base KSU
PCB Code Reference Table
TBSU,
PCB Fixed Slot
Code
Ports/Type
TCOU,
Common Control
91
None
TMAU2
DKU
KSTU2
TCIU2
TDDU or
Common Control w K4RCU3
92
4 DTMF/ABR
TBUU
Common Control w/K5RCU or 98
5 DTMF/ABR
K5RCU2
Slot Number
00
11
12
13
14
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/PEPU
41
None
91, 92 or 62 or
00, 11, 16, 00 or
00 or
PEKU
21
8 EKT
PCB Code
98
64
or 77
31
81
PEKU with EOCU
22
8 EKT
PCB Type
PEKU with DSS
23
8 EKT
PEKU with EOCU, DSS
24
8 EKT
Options
PESU
25
2 SLT/4 EKT
Station/BRI
PESU with EOCU
26
Port Numbers
KSTU2/RSTU2/Stratagy DK
31
4 SLT/8 SLT/8VM
CO/DID/BRI
TCOU/PCOU/RCOU/RGLU2
11
4/CO
Line Numbers
RCOU + RCOS
17
8 Loop CO
Base Unit DKT CKTs, PDKU,
DK40i Expansion KSU
61
8 DKT
and RWIU
Cabinet Label
04
05
06
07
Base Unit DKT CKTs
62
8 DKT
& PDKU w/ DIU or SP-OCA
Slot Number
15
16
17
18
Base Unit DKT CKTs and
PDKU with DSS (w/ or w/o
64
8 DKT
PCB Code
DIU or SP-OCA)
KCDU
65
2/CO, 4 DKT
PCB Type
KCDU SP-OCA or DIU
66
2/CO, 4 DKT
Options
RDSU (RSTS)
27
4 DKT/4 SLT
Station/BRI Port Numbers
RDSU (RSTS) with DIU or
28
4 DKT/4 SLT
SP-OCA
CO/Tie/DID/BRI/T1
RDDU/TDDU
16
4 DID Lines
Line Numbers
71
T1 Lines 8 ch. (R4.3)
RDTU
Notes
72
T1 Lines 12 ch. (R4.3)
REMU 13
4-Tie
Lines
For systems containing ISDN PCBs, immediately after running
Program 03, make sure to run Program *60 to identify all
RCIU2/RCIS/TCIU2
81
4 or 8 Caller ID
station (NT/LT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits for each BRI circuit
TBSU or RBSU
77
2 BRI S/T
installed. Program *60 causes station port and CO line shifting
TBUU or RBUU
75
BRI U interface (R4.3)
on PCBs installed in higher slots that follow the BRI PCBs.
RBSU/RBSS
78
4 BRI S/T
Consult DK40i configuration section to check that the DK40i is
RBUU/RBUS
76
2 BRI U ckts.
configured properly.
83
12 PRI Lines (R4.3)
RPTU and RDTU can be installed in slot 15 or 17 only. If one of
RPTU
these PCBs is installed in slot 17, then slot 18 must be left
84
8 PRI Lines (R4.3)
vacant. If an RPTU or RDTU is installed in slot 15, then slots
TSIU
No Code Required
16, 17, and 18 can be used for other PCBs.
None
00
None
RWIU must be installed in slot 15 to provide 16 handsets or slot
17 to provided eight handsets.
3-4
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments
Program 03 for DK40i - Overview
Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed in the Expansion KSU. You
must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA, DIU, etc. Also, run Program
03 for each PCB slot when installing a PCB in that location.
It is not necessary to run Program 03 for slots 00~14. The DK40i automatically assigns the Base
KSU PCBs if they are installed when system power is turned On. However, if DSS is required on
the Base KSU's DKT circuit 8, you must run Program 03 to assign code 64 to slot 11. If universal
PCBs are installed, Program 91-1 and 91-9 automatically assign the appropriate PCB codes to the
installed slots. But, Programs 91-1 or 91-9 do not assign option codes (such as OCA, DIU, etc.).
Codes allowed in DK40i Expansion KSU: 11, 13, 16, 21~28, 31, 41, 61~62, 64~66, 77, 78, 91, 92 and 81.
CAUTION!
Running Program 91-9 erases Program 03 option codes; Program 91-1 does
not.
Important!
After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running Off and
wait five seconds before turning it back On.
Program 03 is the main record sheet for the hardware configuration of the entire system. It
provides space to record station ports assigned to the station, and numbers assigned to the ground
loop start, CO, Tie, and DID line PCBs. Use the PCB Code Reference Table on the Program 03
record sheet to determine the proper option code for each PCB with an option.
The DK40i Base KSU is divided into four fixed slots, even through the unit has no slots per se.
System & Station
Slot 00 represents the system's common control (TMAU2) and optional K4RCU3, K5RCU, or
K5RCU2
Slot 11 contains the KSU's eight digital circuits/ports (DKU)
Slot 12 contains the KSU's four optional CO or DID line circuits (TCOU or TDDU) or two
BRI (TBSU or TBUU) circuits
Slot 13 contains the four optional standard telephone circuits KSTU2
Slot 14 contains four optional Caller ID circuits for TCOU (TCIU2)
Slots 15 or 17 support the RDTU (T1) and RPTU (PRI) cards. If one of these PCBs is installed
in slot 15, slot 16 can be used. If installed in slot 17, slot 18 cannot be used.
DK40i Slots 15~18 (Expansion KSU Assignment Criteria)
Allowed PCBs: PDKU, RDSU/RSTS, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PEKU, PESU, KCDU,
PRBSU/RBSS, RBUU/RBUS, RCOU/RCOS, RGLU2, RCIU2/RCIS, RWIU, PCOU, RDDU,
REMU, PEMU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, PEPU, Stratagy DK.
Note
Some PCBs cannot be installed in slot 18 (see Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration of the
Strata DK I&M Manual).
Expansion KSU PCBs must be installed in the slots specified in Tables 2-9~2-15, beginning
on or the system may not operate properly.
Slots 15 and 16 support Speaker OCA and RPCI/DIU Data Switching; slots 17 and 18 do not.
All slots support Handset OCA and RPCI-DI TAPI operation.
On DK40i, RCIU2 must be installed in slot 17; RCIU1 cannot be used.
The RWIU must be installed in slot 15 and slot 16 must be vacant to support 9 to 16 wireless
handsets. It can be installed in any expansion slot to support 1~8 wireless handsets.
If the RWIU supports 9 to 16 handsets, program code 61 in slot 15 and 16.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-5

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot
Assignments
Processor Type:
All RCTUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Programs 91-1 or 91-9;
Code 00 for empty slots
more codes

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On.
SELECT = Slot Number (00, 01, 11~78)
CARD = PCB Code (See Reference Table)
or...
Run Program 91-2
DK424 Base Cabinet 1
00
01
Slot Number
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
(R11)
(RCTU)
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 2
Slot Number
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 3
Slot Number
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 4
Slot Number
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
3-6
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 5
Slot Number
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 6
Slot Number
S61
S62
S63
S64
S65
S66
S67
S68
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 7
Slot Number
S71
S72
S73
S74
S75
S76
S77
S78
PCB Code
PCB Type
System & Station
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424 and DK424i PCB Codes
PCB
Code
Ports/Type
PCB
Code
Ports/Type
RCOU, RGLU2
11
4 Gnd./Loop Lines
RDTU
71
8 T1 Channels
REMU
13
4 Tie Lines/4 Stations
RDTU
72
16 T1 Channels
RDDU
16
4 DID Lines/4 Stations
RDTU
73
24 T1-channels
RCOU/RCOS
17
8 Loop CO Lines
RCTU
91
None
RCTU or BCU with 4-CKT
RCMU/RCMS
19
E911 CAMA
92
None
RRCS or BRCS
RCTU or BCU with 8-CKT
PEKU
21
8 Stations
93
None
RRCS or BRCS
RRCTU or BCU with 12-CKT
PEKU (EOCU)
22
8 Stations
94
None
RRCS or BRCS
PEKU w/DSS
23
8 Stations
NONE
00
00
PEKU (DSS, EOCU)
24
8 Stations
RATU
51
4 Stations
PESU
25
6 Stations
RSIU
49
I/O Interface
PESU (OCA)
26
6 Stations
RCIU2/RCIS
81
8 CKT, Caller ID
RDSU/RSTS
27
8 Stations
Stratagy DK
31
8 VM Ports
2 U Interfaces
RDSU/RSTS (OCA, DIU)
28
8 Stations
RBUU without RBUS
75
(4 stations/4 CO lines)
4 U Interfaces
RSTU2
31
8 Stations
RBUU with RBUS
76
(8 stations/8 CO lines)
2 S/T Interfaces
PIOU, PIOUS/ RSSU, PEPU
41
Remote Maintenance (TTY)
RBSU without RBSS
77
(4 stations/4 CO lines)
4 S/T Interfaces
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU
42
MIS for ACD (TTY)
RBSU with RBSS
78
(8 stations/4 CO lines)
PRI Interface
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU
43
SMDI VM Interface (TTY)
RPTU Interface Card
79
(23 CO lines)
PDKU2, RWIU
61
8 Stations
83
16 PRI Lines (R4.3)
RPTU
PDKU2 (OCA, DIU)
62
8 Stations
84
8 PRI Lines (R4.3)
PDKU2 (DSS, OCA, DIU)
64
8 Stations
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-7

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot
Assignments
Processor Type:
All BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Programs 91-1 or 91-9;
Code 00 for empty slots
more codes

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On.
SELECT = Slot Number (00, 01, 11~78)
or...
CARD = PCB Code (See Reference Table)
Run Program 91-2
See Worksheet 6 in the Strata DK I&M Manual Chapter 6 for PCB placement.
DK424i Base Cabinet 1
Slot Number
B101
B102
S101
S102
S103
S104
S105
S106
S107
S108
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424i Expansion Cabinet 2
Slot Number
S201
S202
S203
S204
S205
S206
S207
S208
S209
S210
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424i Expansion Cabinet 3
Slot Number
S301
S302
S303
S304
S305
S306
S307
S308
S309
S310
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
DK424i Expansion Cabinet 4
Slot Number
S401
S402
S403
S204
S405
S406
S407
S408
S409
S410
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
3-8
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
DK424i Expansion Cabinet 5
Slot Number
S501
S502
S503
S504
S305
S306
S307
S308
S309
S310
PCB Code
PCB Type
Options
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN
Port Numbers
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers
See the following text for specific installation rules on the above PCBs.
Program 03 for DK424i - Overview
Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed.
The Program 03 record sheet is the main record for the hardware configuration of the entire
system. It provides space to record station ports assigned to the station, Tie, and DID line PCBs
and line numbers assigned to the ground loop start, CO, Tie, and DID line PCBs.
See "DK424 and DK424i PCB Codes" on Page 3-7 to determine the proper option code for PCBs
with options. You must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA, RRCS,
DIU, etc. Also, run Program 03 for the slot of each new PCB when installing a new PCB in an
existing installation.
If universal PCBs are installed, Program 91-1 and 91-9 automatically assigns the appropriate PCB
System & Station
codes to the installed slots. But, they do not assign option codes (such as OCA, PDIU, RRCS,
etc.).
CAUTION!
Running Program 91-9 erases Program 03 option codes; Program 91-1 does
not.
Important!
After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running Program
91-2 or turn the base cabinet power supply switch off and wait five seconds before
turning it back on.
See Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration (Strata DK I&M Manual) to determine PCB
slot placement.
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU
Codes 41, 42, and 43 assigns PIOU/PIOUS RSSU TTY port as Remote Maintenance, MIS for
ACD, and SMDI respectively; SMDR, Paging, Relay Control, and other miscellaneous options are
active on the PIOU/PIOUS that has the lowest number code (41, 42 or 43) in the system. Codes set
for RSIU/RSIS/RMDS in Program 76 have priority over codes 41, 42, and 43.
Piggyback PCB / Speaker OCA / Data Interface Unit Options
Run Program 03 to assign codes for all options except RCOS. Program 91-9 erases option codes
assigned with Program 03; Program 91-1 does not erase option codes already programmed. After
completing all Program 03 data entry, run Program 91-2 or cycle system power to transfer
Program 03 data into working memory.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-9

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
RCIU/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS
When installing RCIU2/RCIS, enter the Caller ID circuit numbers on the record sheet in place of
the CO line number. Each RCIU2/RCIS slot uses eight Caller ID circuits. RCIU2/RCIS circuit
numbers are assigned automatically in numerical order (001~200) starting with the lowest slot
number, to the highest RCIU2/RCIS slot number in 8-circuit increments.
Important!
If more than four circuits are needed, never install an RCIU without an RCIS.
On DK424 and DK424i, RCIU2/RCIS can be installed in any universal slot except slot 11 or if
RSIU is installed, slot 12; they do not have to be installed adjacent to corresponding CO lines.
Refer to Program *50 to manually assign RCIU2/RCIS circuits to CO line circuits.
RWIU
Code 61 must be set for all RWIU slots including slots that are vacant because they support RWIU
channels 09~32.
RCTU and BCU
The table below gives you slot locations and PCB Code Assignments for all processor PCBs.
RCTU Slot
PCB Code
Processor
R11 Slot
Slot Code
Cabinet 1
Assignment
RCTUA
No
Yes
00
91~94
RCTUB
No
Yes
00
91~94
RCTUBA
Yes
No
00
91~94
RCTUBB
No
Yes
01
91
RCTUC
Yes
No
00
91~94
RCTUD
No
Yes
01
91~94
RCTUE
Yes
No
00
91~94
RCTUF
No
Yes
01
91~94
B102 Slot
PCB Code
Processor
B101 Slot
Slot Code
Cabinet 1
Assignment
PCB Codes:
91 = No RRCS
B1CU
No
Yes
00
91~94
92 = 4 -circuit RRCS
B CAU
Yes
No
00
91~94
93 = 8 -circuit RRCS
94 = 12 -circuit RRCS
B
CBU
No
Yes
01
91~94
= 2, 3, or 5
Note
When using RCTUA, Slot 15 and 16 does not support Speaker OCA or DIU Data
Switching. RCTUA does not support RS-232 Voice Mail Integration (SMDI), and
attendant console features.
RSIU
If an RSIU is installed in base cabinet slot 11, you must connect the programming station to circuit
6 in slot 12. In this case, a PDKU or PEKU should be installed in slot 12 and Station Port Number
000~007 will be in slot 12.
If an RSIU is not installed, you must connect the programming station to circuit 6 in slot 11 (Port
005) and/or circuit 6 in slot 12 (port 013). The station must be a 20-button digital LCD or
electronic LCD telephone. Also, if an RSIU is not installed, install a PDKU or PEKU in slot 11.
3-10
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
Program 03 Example
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware
No. 205
Requirements on Page 1-14.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 03
Access Program 03. System beeps after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed
Data Store
to indicate program number may be entered.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
03 Select =
Prepare the system for a selection.
5.
Dial a PCB slot number (00~78 for DK424 or 00-18 for DK40i) using
03 Select = (00~78)
the dial pad.
Card = (91, 62 or 00)
The system defaults as follows:
03 Select = 00 (Slot Number)

Card = 91
Initialized default assigns slot 00 and 01 to be a non-optioned RCTU
without RRCS DTMF receivers, or DK40i Base without K4RCU3,
K5RCU, and K5RCU2.

03 Select = 11 (Slot Number)
System & Station
Initialized default assigns slot 11 to be a non-optioned PDKU without
Card = 61
DSS console or OCA (Code 61).
a
03 Select = 12~78 (Slot
(DK424), a (DK40i)
Number)
Initialized default assigns slot 12~78 to be empty (Code 00).
Card = 00
6.
a
03 Select = (00~78)
Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet. Refer to the PCB
Card = (00~97)
code reference table on Program 03 record sheet for a definition of the
codes.
7.
+ROG
03 Select = (00~78)
Secure data in system programming.
Data Programmed
8.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
03 Select =
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or continue
with Step 9.
9.
+ROG
92 Select = ##
Secure Program 92 data in system memory.
Data Programmed
10. 6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 92 (system beeps). Enter another program number or
exit programming mode (go to Step 11).
11.
+ROG
No. 205
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:58
12. To secure Program 03 entries, Power off for five seconds, then power
on, or run Program 91-2.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-11

System & Station
Program *03 for DK424 Cabinet Type Identification
Program *03 for DK424 Cabinet Type Identification
Processor Type:
RCTUE/F or B5CAU/B5CBU
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: All cabinets = 1

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Cabinet No. (1~7)
Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On.
CABINET = 1 or 2 (type)
or...
Type 1 (DK424 or DK424i)
Type 2 (DK280)
Run Program 91-2
Expansion Cabinet Universal PCB Slot Availability
SELECT =
Cabinet Type
Case 1
(Cabinet No. 1~7)
(1 or 2)
RCTUE/F in DK424 Base Cabinet with MBJU removed
1 (Base)
Expansion Cabinet (max 6)
Universal PCB Slots
2 (1st Expansion)
DK424
1~8 available
DK280
1~6 available
3 (2nd Expansion)
Note
MBJU is not used with DK424i cabinets.
4 (3rd Expansion)
Case 2
5 (4th Expansion)
RCTUE/F in DK280 Base Cabinet
Expansion Cabinet (max 5)
Universal PCB Slots
6 (5th Expansion)
DK424
1~6 available
7 (6th Expansion)
1 only
DK280
1~6 available
Program *03 - Overview
You must run this program when using the DK424 or DK280 RCTUE/F, or DK424i B5CAU/BU.
It identifies which type of cabinets are installed (DK424i, DK424 or DK280).
The RCTUE/F processor can be installed in a DK424 or DK280 base cabinet. The expansion
cabinets can be any combination of DK424 and DK280 - except the seventh expansion cabinet
must be a DK424.
The DK280 expansion cabinet can only support six universal PCB slots in any possible
configuration.
The DK424 expansion cabinet supports eight universal PCB slots only if the RCTUE/F is installed
in a DK424 base cabinet and the MBJU jumper is removed from the DK424 base cabinet
backplane. MBJU does not apply with DK424i cabinets.
Important!
This programs exists on DK424i B5CAU/BU processors. It must always be set to
Cabinet Type "1" allowing 10 slots for each DK424i Expansion Cabinet. DK280
and DK424 Expansion Cabinets cannot be used with DK424i processors.
3-12
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See [PDNs] in the record sheets
DK14 Record Sheet

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
[PDN] (1~4 digits)
(see table below)

Physical
Modular Jack
Logical
[PDNs]
Port Type for Different Base Configurations
Ports
Location Record
Ports
(Initialized)
KSU
1st QCDU2
2nd QCDU2
QSTU2
000
000
(10)
4 - Digital
001
001
(11)
Telephone
0021
0021
(12)
Ports
0031
0031
(13)
004
004
(14)
2 -Digital
Telephone
005
005
(15)
Ports
006
006
(16)
2 - Digital
System & Station
Telephone
007
007
(17)
Ports
008
008
(18)
2 - Standard
Telephone
0092
0092
(19)
Ports
1. Supports a Digital Telephone or a DDCB Door Phone Control Box.
2. Supports Alternate Background Music (BGM).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-13

System & Station
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
DK40i Record Sheet

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Logical
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
[PDN] (1~4 digits)
Ports
(see table below)
(Initialized)
Refer to Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration before installing PCBs in slots 15~18.
Expansion Slot Configuration Record:
Slot 15 _______ Slot 16 _______ Slot 17 _______ Slot 18 _______
Physical
Modular Jack
Logical
Physical
Modular Jack
Logical
[PDNs]
[PDNs]
Ports
Location Record
Ports
Ports
Location Record
Ports
000
000
016
016
001
001
017
017
002
002
018
018
003
003
019
019
004
004
020
020
005
005
021
021
006
006
022
022
007
007
023
023
008 (see
008
024
024
Notes)
009
009
025
025
010
010
026
026
011
011
027
027
012
012
013
013
014
014
015
015
Notes
Expansion slots 15~18: See DK40i Configuration tables in Chapter 2 of the Strata DK I&M
Manual.
If KSTU2 is installed in the Base Cabinet, it uses ports 008~012 unless TBSU or TBUU
circuits are installed and configured as station circuits in Program *60. KSTU2 ports are
shifted to start at Port 010 or 012, depending on TBSU or TBUU configuration. If TBUS or
TBUU is installed in the Base Cabinet, each circuit will use two ports, starting with Port 008,
only if the circuit is configured as a station circuit in Program *60. If the BRI circuit is
configured as a line circuit, it does not use station ports.
Line circuit PCBs (ground, loop, E&M Tie, DID, T1, PRI, BRI) do not use station ports in
DK40i Base or Expansion Cabinets.
3-14
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
DK424 or DK424i Record Sheet

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
Press [PDN] or Button LED 01 to erase (1~4 digits)
Reserved for Special
Processor
DISA Port
Processor
[PDN] Port Range
Initialized [PDNs]
Functions
RCTUA
039
032~039
RCTUA
000~031
200~231
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
089
080~089
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
200~279
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
249
240~249
RCTUC/D,
000~239
200~239
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
344
336~349
RCTUE/F
000~335
100~435
B1CU
000~055
200~255
B2CAU/BU
000~111
200~311
B3CAU/BU
000~191
200~391
B5CAU/BU
000~335
100~435
Modular Jack
Modular Jack
Physical
Logical
Cabinet and Slot
Physical
Logical
Cabinet and Slot
Location
[PDN]
Location
[PDN]
Ports
Ports
Number
Ports
Ports
Number
Record
Record
Cabinet: ______
Cabinet: ______
Slot: ______
Slot: ______
System & Station
Cabinet: ______
Cabinet: ______
Slot: ______
Slot: ______
Cabinet: ______
Cabinet: ______
Slot: ______
Slot: ______
Cabinet: ______
Cabinet: ______
Slot: ______
Slot: ______
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-15

System & Station
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
Program 04 Overview
Program 04 assigns the Primary Directory Number [PDN] to each telephone (logical port). [PDNs]
can be one to four digits. [PDNs] must not conflict with Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] or,
DK424 Distributed Hunt Directory Numbers set in Program 04.
[PDNs] can be changed using Program 04, but door phone and modem numbering cannot.
Door phone standard numbering is #151~#159 and #161~#163; the internal modem (IMDU or
RMDS) is #19 (DK40i and DK424).
[PDNs] cannot begin with the digits 41~49 because 44 is the substitute code to rotary dial the
"#" in feature access codes.
Only the first digit of a feature code can be changed with Program 05. The system automatically
assigns door phone station numbers if a door phone is specified in Program
77-1. [PDN] assignments are flexible so that each station can have up to four assigned digits.
All Strata DK telephone user guides are written using the standard default access codes and
[PDNs]. If desired, a telephone accompanying a DSS console can have an [PDN] of 0 or 01, etc.,
without conflict.
If you make no assignment in Program 04, the system, upon powering up automatically assigns
eight [PDNs] for each station PCB installed and four logical station ports for each PEMU, REMU,
RDDU, and RATU PCB.
RDTU, Tie, and DID channels are also assigned a station port. This is done in sequence of
ascending slot numbers for station port numbers 008 and up.
Attendant consoles ring on the ICI "" button for Dial "0" calls, and on the [PDN] when the
[PDN] assigned to the console (station) port in this program is dialed.
Peripheral Devices other than telephones or DIUs can be connected to the ports listed below. If a
peripheral device is connected to a Physical Port, the Logical Port must have the same port number
as the Physical Port. See the following table.
Logical &
System
Peripheral Device
Physical Ports
00
DK40i
Digital telephone associated with DSS console.
02, 03
DK14
Digital Door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).
04, 12, 20
DK40i
Digital Door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).
07, 015, 027
DK40i
Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS).
10
DK14
DISA port number used for Toll Restriction Class and Verified/Forced
Account Code assignment.
35
DK40i
09
DK40i
Separate background Music Source (KSTU2 required in Base KSU).
Digital telephone associated with DSS console (PDKU/Expansion Unit
required).
00, 08, 020
DK40i
Electronic telephone associated with DSS console (PEKU/Expansion Unit
required).
00, 13, 17
DK40i
DK40i: Separate Background Music Source (PEKU, PESU, or PSTU/
Expansion Unit required). DK14: QSTU2 required.
09
DK14
31
DK40i
IMDU modem.
3-16
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 04 Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment
Program 04 Example
Action (press buttons+LED buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware
No. N-N1
Requirements in Chapter 1 - Overview.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press the [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 04
Access Program 04. The speaker beeps to indicate when to enter a
Data Store
program number.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
04 Select =
Prepare the system for a selection.
5.
a
04 Select = 000
Select a port number (use three digits plus #).
INT = N-N
6.
;;;;
04 Select = 000 ~239
Enter the port's station number (up to four digits) from the record
INT = XXXX
sheet.
Note
Station numbers must not exceed four digits, or conflict with
feature access codes listed in Program 05 record sheet.
7.
+ROG
04 Select = (000~335)
System & Station
Secure data in system programming.
Data Programmed
8.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
04 Select =
Prepare the system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or
continue with Step 9.
9.
+ROG
00 Select = ##
Secure Program 04 data in system memory.
Data Programmed
10. 6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 04 (system beeps). Enter another program number or
continue with Step 11.
11.
+ROG
No. N-N
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:58
1. N-N = program telephone [PDN]
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-17

System & Station
Program *04 [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls
Program *04 [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN]
Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See the legend below

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = [PhDN] or DH [DN] Port Number
[PhDN] or DH [DN] assigned to port number
(see table below)
(1~4 digits, see table below)
To erase existing [PDNs], enter XXXXXX
Press LED Button 01 to erase [PhDNs] and
(low port high port). Adding a new range of
DH[DNs].
[PDNs] cannot be done in this manner.
Processor
[PhDN] Port Range
Initialized [PhDN]
DH [DN] Port Range
Initialized DH [DN]
DK14
500~509
50~59
900~915
850~865
DK40i
500~527
50~77
900~915
850~865
RCTUA
500~531
500~531
900~915
850~865
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
500~579
500~579
900~915
850~865
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU,
500~739
500~739
900~915
850~865
B3CAU/BU
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
500~835
450~785
900~915
850~865
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
[PhDN] or DH [DN]
[PhDN] or DH [DN]
[PhDN] or DH [DN]
[PhDN] or DH
[PhDN] or DH
[PhDN] or DH
Port
Port
Port
[DN]
[DN]
[DN]
3-18
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *04 [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls
Program *04 Overview
Program *04 assigns the system Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] and Distributed Hunt (DH)
Group [DNs].
All DK systems provide 16 DH groups. [PhDNs] and DH [DNs] can be one to four digits.
[PhDNs] and DH [DNs] cannot conflict with each other, or be the same as Primary Directory
Numbers assigned in Program 04. [PhDNs] can not conflict with, or be the same as Distributed
Hunt Directory Numbers assigned in this program. Default [PhDNs] and DH [DNs] are shown in
the legend above the record sheet.
Note
[PhDNs] and DH [DNs] cannot have 41~49 as the first two digits because 44 is the substitute
code to rotary dial the " " in feature access codes.
See Program 09 or 71 for DID line call routing to DH Groups; see Programs 81~89 or
Ground/Loop start CO line call routing to DH Groups.
System & Station
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-19

System & Station
Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering
Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: See record sheet

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Access Code (1~9)
SPECIAL DIAL = New Access Codes
See the table below for standard
The first digit of access codes can be replaced by 2 digits.
access codes.
Press LED Button 01 to enter blanks.
Default
New
Features Affected
Access
Access
(N/A = Not Affected/ Cannot Change)
Code
Codes
0
Unused
Voice First/Tone First (Dial 1-N/A)
Station LCD Messages (10~19-N/A)
Door Phones: (#151~#159; #161~#163)
Station Speed Dial (100~139-N/A) RCTUE/F,
1
B5CAU/BU
IMDU or RMDS Access: DK424 and DK40i (#19)
Station Speed Dial Set (10~49-N/A) RCTUA, BA/BB,
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)
C/D, B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)
ACD Ports (*04, *09, 71)
2
Busy Override (Dial 2-N/A)
Off-hook Call Announce (2-N/A)
Do Not Disturb Override (Dial 2-N/A)
RCTUE/F System Speed Dial (200~999)
RCTUA~C/D, B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)
External Page Zones 1~4 (#35~#38)
Executive Override (Dial 3-N/A)
Group Page (Internal) (#311~#318)
3
All Call Voice Page (#30)
Park + Page (Cnf+#331)
All Call Voice Page with External Spkrs (#39)
Park Pick Up [DN]+#331 (see Program *05)
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU Ext Page Zones (#351~#358)
Park + Hold (Cnf+#332)
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)
T.R. Override/T. Class Code Input (Cnf + #47)
Default [PhDNs] (see Program *04)
BGM Over Stations On (#481)
Automatic Callback (Dial 4-N/A)
BGM Over Stations Off (#480)
CO Line Queuing (Dial 4-N/A)
BGM Over External Speakers On (#491)(Station Port
Station Number Display (#401)
000 only)
Port Number Display (#402)
BGM Over External Speakers Off (#490)(Station Port
Hold (#41)
000 only)
Hold Pickup (#42)
Cancel Message Waiting at Station (#409) from [PDN]
or [PhDN]
4
Automatic Busy Redial (Conf + #44)
Retrieve Message Waiting (#408)
Automatic Busy Redial Cancel (Int + #44)
Access Code/Speed Dial Prefix (44 or #)
Message Waiting Answer (#408) from INT, [PDN], or
[PhDN]
To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed
Dial memory from rotary phones or phones without
Display [PDN], [SDN], or [PhDN] on LCD (#407)
the Speed Dial and Redial buttons, enter 44 + 7XXX
Emergency Call to Attendant Console (#400)
instead of # + 7XXX.
Standard telephone Redial (44) or dial # for feature
Start Trace #489 (Station Port 000 only)
access code
Stop Trace #488 (Station Port 000 only)
Flash (Cnf + #45)
Cancel Auto Call Back (#43)
Account Code Input (Cnf + #46)
3-20
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering
Default
New
Features Affected
Access
Access
(N/A = Not Affected/ Cannot Change)
Code
Codes
Call Pickup Station (#5+Station No.), Ringing CO or
Selected Group Pickup (#5+#320~#339)
DID line (#59)
Own Group(s) Pickup (#5+#34)
Directed Pickup of CO Line on Hold (#5+#7 XXX,
Pickup Ringing Line (#59)
XXX = 001~200),
5
[DN] Pickup #5#2+XXX (XXX=[PDN] or [PhDN], DK
Pick-up External Page (#5 +#30 or for Zone Page
Release 3.1 and above)
#5+#35~#38)
Verified Account Codes (DK14, DK40i, RCTUA~C/D:
#5#79 Pick up Tandem Connection (Release 3.2 and
Speed Dial + 50; RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU Speed Dial +
above)
050)
Call Forward (#601, #602, #603, #604)
T.R. Override Code Change (#654, #655)
Timed Reminder (#605~#609)
System Speed Dial
M/W for Voice Mail On (#63+Station No.)
(N/A 600~699 RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and
B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU)
M/W for Voice Mail Off (#64+Station No.)
System Speed Dial Set (N/A 60~99 - DK14, DK40i
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Call Fwd, #656)
and RCTUA)
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Ans. MW, #657)
LCD User Name (#621-Set, #620-Reset, TR dial plan
LCD Message Set (#68)
Set #650 +6267 +7/8/9 Change
DKT Mute Ring Adjust (#6101)
DISA Security Code Change (#658)
6
DKT Ring Level Adjust (#6102)
Verified Account Code Change (#659)
Port Swap/Station Relocation Off (#6281)
Set LCD Messages (#68)
Station Relocation On (#6282)
System LCD Messages (N/A 60-99)
Logical Port Swap On (#6283)
Traveling Class Code 1~8 Change (#691~#698)
Call Forward Ext Set or Remote Change Code (#670)
Logical Port Swap (#627 + Destination Intercom No.)
System & Station
Date Set (#651)
Physical Port Calling (#629 + Physical Port No.)
Time Set (#652)
Message Waiting Set/Cancel (N/A) (7) (77)
Weekday Set (#653)
Night Lock Password Change (#622)
CO Line Outgoing Calls (#7001~#7200)
7
To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed Dial memory from rotary telephones or telephones without
the Speed Dial and Redial buttons, enter 44 + 7XXX instead of # + 7XXX.
Default Distributed Hunt [DNs] (850~ 865)
8
CO Group Outgoing Calls (801~816)
See Program *04
9
Least Cost Routing or CO Group (9), Distributed Hunt Group Prog *04 Port Ref. (900~915)
Program 05 Overview
Program 05 enables you to change feature access codes. The first digit of a feature access code can
be changed to a different digit or to two digits. Digits after this prefix cannot be changed. Some
access codes cannot be changed (such as the code for Automatic Callback) and are shown with
N/A on the record sheet.
Notes
Access code conflicts may exist if new access codes are assigned, and a new system
numbering plan will have to be implemented.
Be sure access code changes do not conflict with existing access code or station numbering
schemes. Refer to Program 04 Port/Station Number Assignment.
If access codes are being changed to a number that is currently assigned, change the currently
assigned code to an unused code first. In the initialized state, the only unused code is zero (0).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-21

System & Station
Program *05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing
Program *05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
DATA = 1 or 2 digit abbreviated
dialing for Call Park Pickup.
SELECT = Call Park type:
1 = Change #331 Call Park Pickup Code
2 = Change #332 Call Park Pickup Code
It is only necessary to change one code, but
each code can be changed to the same or
different Park Pickup dialing codes.
Program *05 Overview
This program assigns two Call Park Pickup abbreviated dialing codes to pick up parked calls. For
dialing convenience, the 1- (or 2-) digit abbreviation for Call Park Pickup replaces the Call Park
access codes #331 and #332. To park calls, Code #331 and #332 must still be used if the Program
39 3DUN LQ 2UELW buttons are not available on a telephone. Changing the #331 and #332 codes only
applies to Call Park Pickup.
LED 01 blanks out the Call Park abbreviated dialing data.
Example:
If Park Pickup code #331 is changed to the digit "1", Park Pickup functions by dialing 1XXX,
where XXX is the orbit number in which the call is parked.
3-22
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 09 Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station Assignments
Program 09 Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station
Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System and ACD
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Prompt
AUTO ATT DIAL = (1~4 digits)
Press prompt number offered
Enter the station numbers, [PDNs], [PhDNs], DH
to caller. First or second digit.
[DNs], or #4 plus the ACD Group No. which will
receive Auto Attendant calls. Could be if
establishing the first digit.
Press LED Button 01 to delete data.
Dialed Digit (Menu Prompts)
Station Number [PDN]
Department, Division, Etc.
0
1
2
3
System & Station
4
5
6
7
8
9
Program 09 Overview
Program 09 tells the system where to direct calls after incoming Auto Attendant callers dial a
digit(s) in response to the menu of dialing prompts offered by one of the Auto Attendant's digital
announcers.
The exact dialing prompts along with their associated station numbers, [PDNs], [PhDNs],
Distributed Hunt [DN] and ACD group numbers are assigned with this program. The actual
announcements that are delivered to callers are recorded on customer-supplied digital announcers.
The dialing prompts can either be all one-digit or all two-digits (or numbers of 1~4 digits).
One digit dialing prompts can be used, but they cannot conflict with the first digit of the [PDN] in
Program 04 or the [PhDN] and DH [DN] in Program *04.
Two-digit dialing prompts are only used when it is necessary to stop the announcement to prevent
errors in digit translation or when single-digit prompts conflict with [PDN], [PhDN], and DH [DN]
numbering plans. Digit Translation errors occur sometimes when line transmission is low or the
announcement voice frequencies are the same as a DTMF digit and the system RRCS, BRCS,
K4RCU3, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or QSTU3 circuit will not dial or misdials.
The first digit of the two-digit prompts cannot conflict with [PDNs] in Program 04 or [PhDNs] and
DH [DNs] in Program *04.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-23

System & Station
Program 09 Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station Assignments
To create one-digit dialing prompts and to assign the associated destination station numbers
1. Enter Program 09.
2. When "SELECT" appears on the LCD, press the desired digit (prompt). Then "AUTO ATT
DIAL" appears on the LCD.
3. Enter the destination DH or station [PDN] (not Port number) number or plus the ACD
group (per Note) associated with the prompts and then the +ROG button.
4. Press 6SNU and repeat Steps 2 and 3 for more prompt-station entries.
To enter two-digit dialing prompts along with their destination station numbers
1. Enter Program 09 and then see "SELECT" on the LCD.
2. Press the desired leading digit then see "AUTO ATT DIAL" on the LCD.
3. Press and then the +ROG button. The first digit will now be set, and "DATA PROGRAMED"
will again appear on the LCD.
4. Press 6SNU and press a second digit, and then see "AUTO ATT DIAL" on the LCD.
5. Enter the destination station [DN] assigned to the two-digit prompt and then the +ROG button.
6. To complete more prompt-station entries, repeat Steps 4 and 6.
To assign a digit (menu prompt) to an ACD Group
Enter ;; in place of the [DN]) at the "AUTO ATT DIAL" LCD programming prompt,
where XX is the ACD Group number 01~16.
Note
When transmission and DTMF levels are lower than normal or when the digital
announcement voice frequencies match DTMF digital frequencies (talk-off), Auto
Attendant efficiency may be improved with two-digit dialing options, instead of one-digit
dialing options.
3-24
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *09 [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID Ext. Assignments
Program *09 [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments
Processor Type:
See legend below
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See legend below

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Port No. (see legend)
DIAL = DID Extension Number (1~4 digits)
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port). (Do not
Press LED Button 01 to erase extension numbers.
press # after entering a port range.) Then enter the lowest DID Ext.
number as the first Ext. number in the range.
Processor
[PDN] Port Range [PDN] Ext. #
Processor
[PDN] Port Range [PDN] Ext. #
DK14
000~009
10~19
B1CU
000~055
200~255
DK40i
000~027
10~37
B2CAU/BU
000~111
200~311
RCTUA
000~031
200~231
B3CAU/BU
000~191
200~391
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
200~279
B5CAU/CU
000~335
100~435
RCTUC/D
000~239
200~439
RCTUE/F
000~335
100~435
[PhDN]
System & Station
[PhDN]
DH Group
DH Ext. #
ACD
RMDS/IMDU
Modem
Processor
Port
ACD Ext. #
Ext. #
Ports
Default
Port #
Modem Port [PhDN] Ext. #
Range
DK14
500~509
50~59
900~915
Blank
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DK40i
500~527
50~77
900~915
Blank
N/A
N/A
031
41
RCTUA
500~531
500~531
900~915
Blank
N/A
N/A
035
235
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
500~579
500~579
900~915
Blank
090~097
290~297
085
285
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
500~739
500~739
900~915
Blank
250~265
450~465
245
445
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
500~835
450~785
900~915
Blank
345~360
850~865
340
840
[PDN],
[PDN],
[PDN],
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD
[PhDN], DH,
[PhDN], DH,
[PhDN], DH,
or Modem Port
or Modem Port
or Modem Port
ACD or
ACD or
ACD or
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)
Modem Port
Modem Port
Modem Port
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-25

System & Station
Program *09 [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID Ext. Assignments
Program *09 Overview
This program assigns the routing destinations for incoming DID line calls.
Program *09 DID extension numbers can be routed to [PDNs], [SDNs], or [PhDNs], ACD
Groups, or Distributed Hunt groups. Each [PDN]/[SDN] and/or [PhDN] can appear and ring
(immediate, 12 sec. delay or 24 sec. delay with Program *71, *72 and *73) on up to 120
telephones. A DID extension number can ring up to 120 telephones maximum.
Any DID line can be assigned to route with Program 71 and 72 DNIS routing assignments, instead
of Program *09 assignments, to provide all the DNIS call routing features to normal DID lines.
Which program options (Program *09 or Program 71 and 72) DID line call routing will follow is
determined for each DID line in Program 17, LED 05 and/or 07 (see Program 17 for more details).
On DK424, DID calls will alternately ring all or selected Attendant Consoles (in the load share
group, assigned in Program 81-89) when a DID Attendant Console extension number is assigned
to ring any one of the Attendant Console ports in the load share group.
3-26
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-1 System Assignments, Part 1 of 3
Program 10-1 System Assignments, Part 1 of 3
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: LEDs 07, 08, 09, 16, 18, 19 and 20 are On

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in
the table below.
Button/
X
LED On
LED Off
LED
Not Allowed
20
Two-CO Line Conference/Allowed
Two-CO line Conference must be allowed for Tandem Line, DISA,
CF-EXT, and DNIS external routing operation. Also See Program
15, Code 5.
19
Conference/Allowed
Not Allowed
18
Ring Detect Time-Normal
Ring Detect Time-Short Rings
Station to Station Call Volume PAD (-
17
No Station to Station Call PAD
8db)
16
BRI Standard Initialization (2 TEIs)
None (TEI = 0)
15~13
Not Used
Not Used
12
ABR Cycles/10 times
15 times
System & Station
11
ABR Redial time/30 sec.
1 min.
System Speed Dial Override, Toll
10
Restricted
Restriction
09
Exclusive Hold/Allowed
Not Allowed
08
Alternate Point Answer
Transfer Privacy
Not Allowed
07
Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed
If Ring Transfer is allowed, set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program
37; if ring transfer is not allowed (LED 07 Off), the station recalls
immediately if transfer is attempted.
Standard Ring
06
CO Line Repeat Ringing
Standard ring pattern is 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off.
05
Incoming Call Abandon 8 sec.
6 sec.
80 msec.
LED 04 DTMF Signal Time applies to manual and speed dial tones
sent out of the system via CO lines. This applies when dialing from
04
CO Line DTMF Signal Time 160 msec.
any Toshiba telephone, including the 2000-series Digital Telephone.
LED 04 does not apply to Call Forward or Voice Mail ID DTMF tones
sent to voice mail ports. (See Program 10-2, LED 06, for tones sent
to Voice Mail ports.)
03
Dial Pulse Make Ratio 33%
40%
CO Line Re-seize guard time 0.45
CO line guard time is the time interval the system requires to release
02
0.45 or 1.5 sec. per Program 42-0
a CO line and reseize it. If LED 02 is off, all lines are set with 0.45
second guard time; if LED is on, guard time is 0.45 or 1.5 seconds
per Program 42-0.
Voice First (from SLTs, DKTs and EKTs)
01
Tone First (from SLTs, DKTs and EKTs)
This applies to [PDNs] not [PhDNs]; [PhDNs] are always tone first.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-27

System & Station
Program 10-1 System Assignments, Part 1 of 3
Program 10-1 Overview
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-1:
LED 20: Two-CO Line Conference
Two lines can be conferenced with one or two telephones (digital, electronic, or standard).
Conference (see LED 19) in this program to enable this feature. Also, Two-line Conference must
be allowed for DISA, CF-EXT, and DNIS external routing use of outgoing lines. CO lines must be
enabled for tandem connection with Program 15, Code 5.
LED 19: Conference
Gives stations the ability to enable (LED 19 On) or disable (LED 19 Off) any Conference.
LED 18: Ring Detect Time
Sets normal ring detect time (LED 18 On). Only use the normal setting, except unless connected to
CO/Centrex lines that send ring signals less than 120 milliseconds.
LED 17: Station-to-Station Call Volume PAD
On reduces station-to-station talk path volume (-8 dB). LED 17 should be Off in all cases except
where extreme quiet room noise is expected.
LED 16: BRI Standard or Non-initializing Terminal
Determines the initialization process for BRI lines connected to the ISDN network. A normal
sequence is followed if this is turned On. If it is Off, no initialization sequence is needed.
LED 12: Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Cycles
If activated from an electronic or digital telephone, ABR retries dialing a telephone number on a
line if a far end busy signal is detected. Turn LED 12 On to have the system try up to 10 times; turn
Off for up to 15 attempts. This feature is not available with standard telephones and/or Tie or DID
lines.
LED 11: ABR Redial Time
Upon detecting a far end busy signal on a line, ABR will retry either once every 30 seconds or
once every minute. Turn LED 11 On for 30 seconds; turn Off for one minute.
LED 10: System Speed Dial Override, Toll Restriction
System Speed Dial can be chosen to override Toll Restriction if LED 10 is turned On.
LED 09: Exclusive Hold
Exclusive Hold allows electronic and digital telephones to place calls on hold (by pressing the
+ROG button twice) so that other stations cannot pick up the held call with a CO /LQH button. This
feature can be disabled on a system-wide basis. Any station can pick up an Exclusive Hold call by
using the call pickup code.
LED 08: Alternate Point Answer/Transfer Privacy
If Transfer Privacy is selected, a ring/blind transferred call can only be answered at the called
station upon transfer of that call (after the transferring party releases the call). With Alternate Point
Answer, any electronic or digital telephone with the appropriate CO line or [DN] button can pick
up a call transferred to another telephone. In either case, Call Pickup will function from any
station. Station [DN] and CO line transferred calls that occur on [DN] buttons are always Private.
3-28
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-1 System Assignments, Part 1 of 3
LED 07: Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed
This option defines station operation for transferring [DN] and CO line calls. If Ring Transfer is
allowed, the system will allow "blind" transfers to busy or idle stations. The transferring station
may release a transferred call before the called party answers. If not allowed, the system will allow
supervised transfers only--the called station must answer before the transferring station releases.
If Ring Transfer is not allowed, immediate recall occurs if "blind" transfer is attempted. The
system denies Ring Transfer to stations in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, and immediate recall
will occur if attempted.
LED 06: CO Line Repeat Ringing
If selected, the incoming ringing timing pattern at a station will be the same as the CO line ringing
pattern. This is used mainly with Centrex or PBX systems which may vary the ring pattern to
distinguish between internal and external incoming calls, etc. If Standard Ringing is chosen, CO
line station ringing will cycle one second on, three seconds off regardless of the incoming ring
pattern. This ringing option may be undesirable for some COs.
LED 05: Incoming Call Abandon Timing
The amount of time between incoming CO line ring signals determines when the system will
discontinue (abandon) sending ringing tones to stations. The choice of six or eight seconds
depends on the line ring pattern. This assignment has no effect if the Line Repeat Ringing (LED
06) option is used.
LED 04: Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Signal Time
System & Station
DTMF signals sent out to CO lines can be either 80 or 160 msecs. in length. DTMF to QSTU2,
KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU ports (including voice mail ports) are not
affected by this assignment. See Program 10-2 for standard telephone port DTMF timing. This
program pertains to manual dialing or speed dialing from all Toshiba telephones, with the
following exception. When dialing manually from 2000-series telephones, signals last as long as
the buttons are pressed (minimum 80 msec.).
LED 03: Dial Pulse (DP) Make Ratio
Dial Pulse timing sent out to CO lines can be changed from the normal 40% make ratio to 33%.
This selection only applies to those CO lines assigned in Program 15 to signal dialing with dial
pulse instead of Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF).
LED 02: Line Reseize Guard Time
Should be set for 0.45 seconds for most installations. Set guard time for 1.5 seconds (using
Program 10-1, LED 02 On, and Program 42-0), if CO lines experience the following situations: no
dial tone when a line is released and reseized immediately; or, when operating behind Centrex or
PBX, false hookflash signals are sent to the CO when stations release and reseize the same line
immediately.
LED 01: Tone First/Voice First Signaling-Electronic and Digital Telephone
With Voice First, a Directory Number call to an electronic or digital telephone will be preceded by
a one-second burst of tone, followed by voice communication via the Handsfree Answerback
function. For Tone First, repetitive Directory Number ring tone is sent in a one-second on, three-
seconds off pattern. Conversion from one signaling mode to the other can be made by dialing an
additional digit of 1 from the calling station. Voice First applies to called [PDNs] only; [PhDNs]
are always tone first regardless of LED 01 setting.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-29

System & Station
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: LEDs 02, 14, 15, and 16 are On

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 2
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in
the table below.
Button/
X
LED On
LED Off
LED
20
Padded DTMF Tone Return When Dialing
DTMF/No DTMF Per Prog 10-2, LED 11
19
External Conference Amp Connected to PEKU
No External Amplifier Connected
18
External Conference Amp Connected to PEKU
No External Amplifier Connected
17
"TRNS" Soft Key--Immediate
"TRNS" Soft Key--Normal
16
Executive Override Warning Tone/On
Executive Override Warning Tone/Off
15
External Page included with All Call Page
Not Included - see Button/LED 20 note.
Privacy Override/Attendant/Supervised Loop
Privacy/Attendant Supervised Loop Override Warning Tone/
14
Warning Tone/On
Off
No Callback Tone. Called party receives notification tone
13
Send Auto Callback Camp-on Tone
when calling party activates Auto Call Back.
12
CO Line 3 min Beep Tone
No Beep Tone
11
No DTMF Tone Return When Dialing
DTMF tone return when dialing
10
BGM connected to PESU, Circuit 8
EKT connected to PESU, CKT 8
09
BGM connected to PEKU, Circuit 3
EKT connected to PEKU, CKT 3
Elapsed Time Display 1 min. After Access or
Elapsed Time Display 15 sec. After Access or Answer a CO
08
Answer a CO line
Line
07
Standard Tel. CO Ring per Prog. 10-1, LED 06
Standard Tel. CO Ring Distinctive
06
VM ID Code DTMF Signal Time 80 ms
160 ms
05
Send Music-on-hold.
Send Ringback Tone to the transferred party.
04
MW cancel from VM: RS-232 or dial #64 + [DN]
MW cancel from VM: Automatic When Answer
03
3 Ringing Modes
2 Ringing Modes
02
Hunt/C.F. override from DSS console's phone
Hunt/C.F. override from DSS console
Voice First (from DSS Console)
01
Tone First (from DSS Console)
This applies to [PDNs] not [PhDNs]; [PhDNs] are always tone
first.
3-30
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
Program 10-2 Overview
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-2:
LED 20: Padded Tone Return
With some Central Offices, callers may experience clicking or squealing sounds or a loud DTMF
tone return during or after dialing. To counteract this, it is recommended that padded tone return or
no tone return be enabled (LED 20 On) or No DTMF tone return (LED 20 Off and LED 11 On). If
this option is not selected (LED 20 Off), Program 10-2, LED 11 selects normal level DTMF
Return or No DTMF Return.
The optional padded DTMF frequency system tone is returned to callers at a lower-than-normal
volume level with each digit dialed from the telephone dial pad or when speed dialing is used.
The tones are also heard by callers routed to voice mail when DK sends VM ID codes.
LED 19: Stations Use External Amplified Conference
Enable this feature (LED 19 On) only if an external amplifier (Program 10-3) is used for Two-line
conference calls. This provides additional amplification to the station during a Two-line
conference call. If Two-CO line conference/tandem call volume is low due to CO line loss,
Toshiba recommends testing two-line Conference with LED 19 On; if it improves the volume level
and there is no hum noise, keep LED 19 On.
Disable this feature (LED 19 Off) if an external amplifier is not switched into two-line conference
calls in all cases. Do this because line unbalance may cause hum noise on the station talk path
System & Station
during Two-CO line conference calls.
LED 18: Two-CO Line Conference
LED 18 should be Off whenever Two-line (Tandem, DNIS Network, External Call Forward,
DISA) connection is allowed (in Program 15-5 and Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20) unless Two-
CO line conference amplifiers are connected (Program 10-3, LED 01~04).
This increases the volume level between the two outside parties on a tandem (two-line)
connection, but it will not affect station volume if conferenced into the tandem connection. If Two-
CO line volume is low due to CO line loss, test the volume level with LED 18 On. If it improves
without adding hum noise, keep LED 18 On.
LED 17: "TRNS" Soft Key Immediate Transfer
If this feature is activated and a transfer is initiated with the "TRNS" Soft Key, the call will ring
transfer (Camp-on Busy) immediately after the last digit of the called station (busy or idle) number
is dialed. This feature does not apply to transfers initiated with the fixed &QI7UQ button or
"CONF" Soft Key.
LED 16: Executive Override Warning Tone
Executive Override allows a station user (if assigned in ) to break into and listen to an existing
station conversation. A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-31

System & Station
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
LED 15: External Page Included with All Call Page
External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing: Directory Number
[DN] + . The $OO &DOO 3DJH button is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only;
external speakers are not included when using the button.
If the All Call voice page access code ( ) is entered, or if the paging number is dialed on
incoming Tie, DID or DNIS lines, external page (all zones) may be included with All Call
telephone speaker paging. This option does not affect the $OO &DOO 3DJH button function, which
activates electronic and digital telephone speakers only, never external page (See Program 17,
LED 01 and Program 71).
LED 14: Privacy Override Warning Tone
Privacy Override allows a station user to enter an existing CO line conversation by pressing a CO
/LQH button (if the called station is assigned in Program 30). A warning tone can be set optionally
to be heard by the conversing parties.
LED 13: Auto Callback Camp-on Tone
A busy called digital or electronic telephone user may optionally hear a one-time beep tone (from
the speaker) signifying that another station has tried to call and has activated the Automatic
Callback feature.
LED 12: CO Line Beep Tone
If this LED is lit, a beep tone will be sent every three minutes to stations on outgoing line calls.
LED 11: Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone Return
This option deletes DTMF tones that are returned to digital or electronic telephones when
manually dialing or speed dialing. It also eliminates auto dial digits returned to callers when digits
are automatically sent to voice mail ports on forwarded calls.
LEDs 10 and 09: Background Music/Music-on-Hold Separation
An alternate Background Music (BGM) source can be sent to digital telephone speakers,
electronic telephone speakers, and external page speakers, while another Music-on-hold (MOH)
source can be sent to lines or internal stations on hold.
The alternate BGM source can be connected to either circuit 3 on a PEKU PCB, circuit 8 on a
PESU PCB, or circuit 2 on a PSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, RSTU2, RSTU, or QSTU2. LEDs 09 and 10
should be Off for RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2, and PSTU alternate BGM. Also run
Program 19 to assign BGM to a PCB slot number.
DK14, DK40i: The normal MOH source can be connected to the MOH RCA jack on the
DK14 KSU or on the DK40i KSU.
DK424 and DK424i: The normal MOH source always connects to an RCTU or BCU. Also
run Program 19 to assign BGM to a PCB slot number.
When disabled (LED 10 Off), deletes DTMF tones returned to digital and electronic telephones
when dialing from dial pad or speed dialing; also deletes auto dial digits from callers that are call
forwarded to voice mail. This does not affect the actual DTMF tones sent out to trunks or voice
mail devices.
When disabled (LED 09 Off) BGM connected to the PEKU or PESU is sent to electronic and
digital telephone speakers and external page (optional). To assign the BGM PCB slot number, see
Program 19-1.
PESU/PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 19-1.
3-32
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
LED 08: Display Dialed Number Timing
An LCD telephone will display a dialed number on outgoing calls and the CO line (Program 93)
ID name, DNIS, ANI, or Caller ID information on incoming calls for either 15 or 60 seconds
before the display changes to the elapsed time of the call.
LED 07: Standard Telephone Distinctive Ring
If Distinctive Ring is enabled (LED 07 On) the CO line call ring pattern is standard: 0.2 seconds
on, 0.4 seconds off, 0.2 seconds on, 3.4 seconds off; intercom ring is always 1 second on, 3
seconds off. This does not apply to VM Ports (Program 31, LED 17 On) which are always standard
ring. The line call ring pattern to standard telephones can be made distinct from the intercom ring
pattern.
If Distinctive Ring is not enabled (LED 07 Off), the pattern is per Program 10-1, LED 06.
Intercom, Transferred, Tie, and DID calls, with or without Distinctive Ring enabled, ring with a 1-
second on and 3-seconds off pattern.
LED 06: Voice Mail Identification Code, Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Signal Time
DTMF digits automatically sent to RSTU/RDSU/RSTU2/RSTS/PSTU/PESU/KSTU2/QSTU2
voice mail ports can be sent in either 80- or 160-millisecond bursts. This applies to digits sent via
the voice mail identification code ( / ) set at each station. This also applies to manually
dialed digits sent to voice mail ports from Toshiba telephones, including 2000-series digital
telephones.
System & Station
LED 05: Music-on-hold or Ring Back Tone
Prior to Release 3.2, transferred parties would either hear Music-on-hold (MOH) or silence. With
Release 3.2 and higher, transferred parties can hear MOH or Ring Back Tone (RBT). Turn LED 05
On to play MOH for transferred parties; turn LED 05 Off to send RBT. If MOH is not installed,
and LED 05 has been turned on, the transferred party will hear nothing.
LED 04: Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial #64/Automatic
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial (LED 04 On) if the Strata DK system is
connected to a voice mail (VM) system that sets station Message Waiting (MW) LEDs by RS-232
or by dialing + Station number, [PDN] or [PhDN] or RS-232 signal. This ensures the message
LED remains flashing and are not cancelled by the DK system until the VM machine cancels the
Message LED by sending an RS-232 signal or pressing + Station Intercom number, [PDN] or
[PhDN].
Also, when using RS-232 Voice Mail Integration (SMDI) LED 16 must be set to On in Program
31, for PGM 10-2 to function.
Set to Automatic (LED 04 Off) to cancel the flashing message waiting LED any time a station
calls the VM machine and the VM machine answers.
LED 03: Ringing Modes
The Strata DK system can be set for either two-ringing mode or three-ringing mode operation. The
Day and Night modes are available with the two-mode operation, and the Day, Day2, and Nights
modes are available with the three-mode operation. Each ringing mode has distinct CO line ring
assignments (Programs 71 (1~3), 78; 81~89 and *81, *84, *87).
The three-mode selection is useful for alternate answering positions. Station users can change
modes with the 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU button on either a DSS console (Program 29), a telephone
(Program 39) and/or Attendant Consoles (Program 59).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-33

System & Station
Program 10-2 System Assignments, Part 2 of 3
This feature applies to loop and ground start lines, and also Tie, DID, and DNIS lines assigned
with Program 17, LED 05 On; these lines will use Program 71 (1~3) assignments. Tie and DID
lines assigned with Program 17, LED 05 Off cannot be routed to different destinations in the Day/
Day 2/Night modes.
LED 02: Call Forward/Station Hunt Override From DSS Console (DK424 and DK40i only)
If a station has activated Call Forwarding or Station Hunting, all calls to that station--except for
calls from the DSS console position--will forward or hunt to another number. You can Call
Forward from the console itself or from the digital or electronic telephone assigned to it. You
cannot Call Forward from both; it is an either/or choice. If the console calls (using the DSS
console station buttons) are forwarded, the telephone attached to the console will not be
forwarded, and vice versa. This allows the console operator flexibility in reaching a station user
that has Call Forward or Station Hunt telephone options activated.
Note
This feature applies to both types of DSS consoles, the DDSS and the HDSS.
LED 01: Tone First/Voice First-DSS Console
The intercom call signal from a DSS console can be set for Tone First Signaling or Voice First
Signaling. This setting is independent of the system-wide signal option in Program 10-1. Thus,
DSS consoles and their attendant stations can ring with different signaling modes. Voice First
applies to called [PDNs] only; [PhDNs] are always tone first.
3-34
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-3 System Assignments, Part 3 of 3
Program 10-3 System Assignments, Part 3 of 3
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: LEDs 11, 13 and 20 On, all other LEDs Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 3
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in
the table below.
Button/
X
LED On
LED Off
LED
SMDI Message Desk Number (001) is sent in SMDI
20
CO line number is sent in SMDI packet.
packet.
19
Speed Dial Entry Timeout- 3 minutes
Speed Dial Entry Timeout - 1 minute
Auto Attendant: Normal Ringing Pattern After Camp-
18
Auto Attendant: Back to Announcement After Camp-on
on
17
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time
16
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time
15
Auto Attendant: Sends MOH to Caller
Auto Attendant: Sends RBT to Caller
SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface, per LED 09
14
Not used
Below
System & Station
13
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-8)
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)
12
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-4)
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)
11
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-2)
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)
10
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-1)
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)
09
Bellcore Standard 1985 Version (1-space)
Bellcore Standard 1985 Version (2-space)
08
Caller ID/ANI numbers are sent out the SMDI port
Caller ID/ANI numbers are not sent out the SMDI port.
07
06
05
PEKU Ports 33, 34-Amp, connected (RCTUBA/BB
04
PEKU Ports 33, 34-stations connected
or higher)
03
PEKU Ports 25, 26-Amp, connected
PEKU Ports 25, 26-stations connected
02
PEKU Ports 17, 18-Amp, connected
PEKU Ports 17, 18-stations connected
01
PEKU Ports 09, 10-Amp, connected
PEKU Ports 09, 10-stations connected
Program 10-3 Overview
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-3:
LED 20: SMDI Message Desk Number
For CO line calls answered by Voice Mail/Auto Attendant devices, either the three-digit CO line
number (001~200) or the Message Desk number (001) can be sent in the Message Desk fields of
the SMDI packet. The system distinguishes CO line number 001 from Message Desk number 001.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-35

System & Station
Program 10-3 System Assignments, Part 3 of 3
LED 19: Speed Dial Entry Timeout
Station users can either have up to one minute or up to three minutes to store a Speed Dial number
or memo. If they do not store the number or memo within the set time, their station exits the Speed
Dial-storage mode and returns to the normal idle state. The timer is required because of the User
Programmable Feature Buttons feature, which allows the [PDN], +ROG, and &QI7UQV buttons to be
programmed in Speed Dial Memory. The three-minute setting is recommended if station users
frequently store memos with Speed Dial numbers using the 0RGH button below the LCD.
LED 18: Built-in Auto Attendant Camp-on Busy/Ring No Answer Routing
This option is designed for Auto Attendant configurations that have primary announcement
devices, but no secondary ones tells the system where to route Auto Attendant calls that ring and
are not answered or have been camped-on for a designated time (see Program 26). The calls can be
sent back to the primary announcement device or to the station or stations assigned to the CO lines'
normal ringing pattern (see Programs 81, 84, and 87).
LEDs 16 and 17: Built-in Auto Attendant Disconnect Time
If LED 18 is assigned for normal ringing, set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect
Built-in Auto Attendant calls that have not been answered by the alternative stations.
The time the Auto Attendant rings stations (per Program 81, 84, 87) after a loop start line caller
does not dial and/or a ringing station does not answer. If a call is not answered before ring
disconnect time period time-out, the call will disconnect. This prevents loop start lines from being
locked-up when there is no CPC supervision from the central office after the outside caller hangs
up.
Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows:
40 seconds: LED 16 Off, LED 17 Off (Initialized default)
120 seconds: LED 16 Off, LED 17 On
240 seconds: LED 16 On, LED 17 Off
LED 15: Built-in Auto Attendant MOH/RBT for Transfer
Callers can hear ring back tone (RBT) or Music-on-hold (MOH) after being transferred from the
Built-in Auto Attendant to a station, depending on the selection made with LED 15.
LED 14: RS-232 Voice Mail Signaling Method
The DK provides two types of RS-232 signaling: Bellcore Standard type (TR-TSY-000283, TR-
NWT-000283) or Toshiba Proprietary. Refer to the VM machine installation documentation and
contact the Toshiba and/or VM machine manufacturer for VM machine SMDI configuration.
Notes
Toshiba VP products require Release 7 software or above for Toshiba proprietary integration.
Toshiba VP products require the SW-X0042 feature package (CO Centrex) for SMDI, but not
for Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 Interface.
Toshiba Stratagy products support SMDI only in the standard configuration, not Toshiba
proprietary RS-232 interface.
3-36
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-3 System Assignments, Part 3 of 3
LEDs 13-10: SMDI Station Number Digit Length
Set LED 10-13 On so that the hex values add up to the Voice Mail station digit length for SMDI
VM interface. (Example: For VP100 or Stratagy/Stratagy DK SMDI interface, set LEDs 10, 11,
and 12 on for 7 digits (1+2+4=7).
Do not set LED 10-13 Off for Toshiba proprietary interface; it is no longer supported by DK
systems.
This refers to the station digit length that the SMDI voice mail system design requires. This
parameter is set for the Voice Mail system digit length; not the DK station digit length. If the voice
mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR-TSY-000283, 1985 version, set this
parameter to seven-digits (LEDs 10, 11, and 12 On which is equal to Hex 7). Current VP and
Stratagy voice mail SMDI systems are designed for this seven-digit operation.
If the voice mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR-NWT-000283, 1991
version, set this parameter between 1-10 digits with LEDs 10, 11, 12, and 13. (See Program 10-3
record sheet for LED-HEX values.) Digit length setting is not necessary with Toshiba Proprietary
Interface (LED 10-13 Off).
LED 08: Caller ID / Automatic Number ID
This option determines if Caller ID (CLID) and/or Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
telephone numbers will be sent out the system SMDI port (SMDI only not Toshiba proprietary):
Turn LED 08, 10, 11, 12, and 13 On if received Caller ID and/or ANI numbers should be sent
out the system SMDI port.
System & Station
Turn LED 08 Off (initialized default) if received Caller ID and/or ANI numbers should not be
sent out the system SMDI port.
LED 09: SMDI Bellcore Standard Version
Toshiba Proprietary and SMDI is available with RCTUB2 or RCTUC/RCTUD2 Release 2 and
above only and is only for use with Toshiba VP systems, not with Toshiba Stratagy systems.
Bellcore released two versions of the SMDI specification. Contact your voice mail machine
vendor to determine which specification to enable with this program TR-TSY-000283, Issue 1,
July 1985 version, or the TR-NWT-000283, Issue 2, May 1991 version. Toshiba VP and Stratagy
SMDI products currently use the 1985 version. In either case, the VM station digit length must be
set with LED 10~13 as shown above.
Also note that the 1985 and 1991 version Bellcore specifications use different space/character
parameters for some call types which means the DK will not operate properly if the correct version
is not selected. Select the 1985 version (LED 09 Off) for Toshiba VP and Stratagy products. This
selection is not needed with Toshiba Proprietary Interface.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-37

System & Station
Program 10-3 System Assignments, Part 3 of 3
LEDs 01~04: Amplified Conference Assignments
Light LEDs 01~04 to identify which PEKU ports should be connected to external amplifiers.
External Amplified Conference is provided by customer-supplied two-way amplifiers connected
to system PEKU ports to amplify "two-line" calls.
DK40i, DK424 and DK424i: Up to four amplifiers can be connected, depending on the DK
system type (two PEKU ports per amplifier). The number of simultaneous Two-CO line
conferencing (three-party) calls varies according to the processor:
DK40i: 4 calls (2 amplified)
RCTUA: 4 calls (3 amplified)
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, B2CAU, B3CAU: 10 calls (4 amplified)
RCTUE, B5CAU: 20 calls (4 amplified)
For DK 40, DK424 and DK424i, amplifiers are switched into Two-CO line calls
automatically, one amplifier for each call, starting from the lowest PEKU ports enabled to the
highest (see Program 10-3 record sheet). Skipping ports is allowed. Two-CO line calls
established after all amplifiers are in use will not be amplified.
Example
The first amplifier can be connected to PEKU ports 017 and 018, skipping ports 009 and 010. In
this case, LED 02 should be On and LED 01 should be Off. (See Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20;
Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19; and Program 15-5 for more information on Two-line Conference.)
Important!
The amplifiers used for supervised, Two-line Conference connections are switched
in automatically starting with the first connection. Calls made when there are no
amplifiers available will not be amplified. Unsupervised Two-line tandem
connections are not limited to the numbers listed above (by processor), but are
limited by the number of lines equipped in the system.
Note
External amplifiers also amplify two-line DISA, Call Forward External, DNIS externally
routed calls, DID, and Tie line trunk to trunk calls.
3-38
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-4 ACD/ISDN/Tandem Parameters
Program 10-4 ACD/ISDN/Tandem Parameters
Initialized Default: LEDs 12 and 14 are On

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 4
Light Button/LEDs as defined by the table below. If
the X column is checked, the LED should be On.
Button/
X
LED On
LED Off
LED
20
Call Waiting LCD DIsplay (R4.15)
No Call Waiting LCD Display (R4.15)
19
Tie line tandem 16 connection buffers. (R4.3)
No Tie line tandem connection buffers. (R4.3)
18
Tie line tandem 8 connection buffers. (R4.3)
No Tie line tandem connection buffers. (R4.3)
17
Tie line tandem 4 connection buffers. (R4.3)
No Tie line tandem connection buffers. (R4.3)
16
Not used.
Not used.
15
Single Line Telephone (SLT) can retrieve held call.
SLT cannot retrieve held call.
ISDN "Start" access code is sent when the Speed Dial
14
ISDN Start access code is not sent.
(SD) button is pressed (initialized) (R4.15).
Receive 3.1kHz audio calls as speech calls only if a
13
Always receives 3.1kHz calls.
progress indicator is sent.
12
BRI T-Wait On (initialized)
BRI T-Wait Off
11
PRI T-Wait On
PRI T-Wait Off (initialized)
10
Not used.
Not Used.
System & Station
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) Registration will route
Unknown number or call type will not route and caller
09
unknown number or call type in numbering plan.
will hear reorder tone.
Program 10-4 Overview
This program enables various station and line features, including Call Waiting, Tie line tandem
connections, Single Line Telephone call retrieval, ISDN and LDN routing.
Important!
This program also covers ACD features. See Chapter 6 of this document for
Program 10-4 ACD functions.
LED 09: Listed Directory Number (LDN) Registration (Release 4.15)
On ISDN incoming calls, LDN Registration routes unknown number or call type in numbering
plan when LED 09 is On; unknown number or call type will not route and caller hears reorder tone
when LED 09 is Off.
LED 10: Not Used
LED 11: PRI ISDN Timer
The T-Wait timer is an ISDN timer that is required to reduce the potential for a network overload
condition due to a large number of ISDN terminals requesting initialization at the same time (e.g.,
due to an area-wide power failure). This timer creates a random time interval and is called upon
power up to set a value to delay the initialization process until the timer has expired. This timer is
seldom used for PRI interfaces.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-39

System & Station
Program 10-4 ACD/ISDN/Tandem Parameters
LED 12: BRI ISDN Timer
The T-Wait timer for BRI and PRI terminals works the same way. See LED 11 for a description.
This timer should be used for BRI terminals and only disabled if the local provider instructs
disabling this timer.
LED 13: 3.1kHz Audio
Calls received from the non-ISDN portion of the public network come in 3.1 kHz audio. A
progress indicator is not always provided for these types of calls. Turning LED 13 Off allows all
calls to be received. Toshiba recommends keeping LED 13 Off until some time in the future when
the public network is updated to send a progress indicator with all calls.
LED 14: ISDN Start Button Access Code (Release 4.15)
When LED 14 is On, the ISDN 6WDUW button access code is automatically sent when the 6SHHG
'LDO (or 6') button is pressed. The default is On. If LED 14 is Off, the number entry timer
expires.
LED 15: Single Line Telephone Off-Hook Retrieval of Held Calls (Release 4.15)
If the [SDN] is on exclusive hold, then the Single Line Telephone (SLT) cannot retrieve the call
when it goes off hook.
If LED 15 is Off, the SLT cannot retrieve a call from hold on an [SDN] on a DKT by going off
hook. If LED 15 is On, the SLT can retrieve a call on hold when if goes off hook if a DKT has an
[SDN] of the SLT on it and it is on hold.
If an SLT places a call on hold by entering , then the SLT cannot retrieve the call from hold
when it goes Off Hook. must be entered from the SLT.
LED 16: Not Used
Release 4.3 Only
LEDs 17,18,19: Buffer assignments for LCR/TR over Tie Line Tandem connections (R4.3)
This feature applies to analog and T1 Tie lines, but not ISDN PRI/BRI Tie lines.
Toll Restriction (TR) and Least Cost Routing (LCR) on tandem calls: When a DK system receives
an incoming call on a analog Tie line and the originator, on the far-end system, dials the access
code of an outgoing CO line, TR and LCR will be applied to the outgoing tandem call. TR and
LCR will be applied according to the TR/LCR programming of the DK receiving the incoming Tie
line call and placing the outgoing tandem call.
Call Park on tandem calls: Once the outgoing call is made over a Tie line it can be parked and
retrieved by the originating caller at the far end system.
To allow the above features to function, station port memory must be used as working memory
buffers during call processing time. Use Key/LED 17, 18 and 19 to assign memory buffers (see
Table 3-1). The number of memory buffers assigned must match the number of DTMF receivers
installed in the DK system (receiving the Tie line call) that is establishing the outgoing tandem
connection.
3-40
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 10-4 ACD/ISDN/Tandem Parameters
DTMF/
LED 19
LED 18
LED 17
Buffers
0
Off
Off
Off
4
Off
Off
On
8
Off
On
Off
12
Off
Off
On
16
On
Off
Off
20
On
On
On
24
On
On
Off
Note
LEDs 19,18 17 Off disables the
feature.
Table 3-1
DTMF Buffers
Important!
The ports used for buffer memory are not available for telephones. The ports are
automatically assigned from the highest numbered port down, for the number of
ports used. Example, if four ports are needed as buffers in an RCTUC/D, then ports
239, 238, 237 and 236 will not be viable for telephones.
The first port that uses memory for this feature, by processor:
DK40i = 027
System & Station
RCTUA = 032
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU = 079
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU = 239
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU = 335
To assign a TR/LCR class of service to Tie lines receiving the incoming call, the Tie lines must be
placed in a CO line group in Program 16. Each Tie line can be assigned to different groups but an
individual Tie line can only be assigned to one group.
Once a Tie line is assigned to a line group in Program 16, it must be assigned a class of service in
the appropriate programs: 30, 40, 41, 43, 48 and 56. In these programs, ports 900~916 must match
the appropriate Tie line group number 01~16, respectively.
Port Number
Program 16 Line Group Number
900
00
901
01
.
.
.
.
.
.
916
16
Example: Program 48-901#100, is the Program 48 assignment for all Tie lines in trunk group 01.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-41

System & Station
Program *10 Enhanced 911 Operation
Program *10 Enhanced 911 Operation
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: See each program
Program *10 provides two QSTU2, RSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, or PESU ports to be assigned
to interface with central office E911 trunks.
E911 enhanced operation provides locator information to the responding agency to provide more
complete name and address information, including building, floor, etc. This is done by sending the
station number of the 911 caller to the E911 emergency center. This locator information is then
cross referenced with name/number/address data in the E911 central database, and the E911
operator receives the precise location along with the basic information.
The Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424 accomplishes this through a special interface between the
KSU and the CO. This special interface takes the station number information and sends it through
the public network in a format compatible with the central E911 database. This special interface is
required in addition to sending software within the Strata DK.
The required interface is an external device (Telident or Proctor) that interfaces to up to two
standard analog station ports.
Strata DK
Central
KSTU2
Tip/Ring E911 CKT #1
CAMA Trunk #1
Office
Proctor or
QSTU2
Telident
RSTU
Tip/Ring E911 CKT #2
E911 Interface
CAMA Trunk #2
RDSU
E911
PESU
Center
1687
E911 CKT 1 and 2 assigned in Program *10
Figure 3-1
Physical Connection of E911 Interface
Programs *10-11 and *10-12 E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
First E911 Port = 11
E911 RSTU/KSTU2 Port Number
Second E911 Port = 12
E911 RSTU/KSTU2/QSTU2 Port Number
First Standard Port
Second Standard Port
3-42
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *10 Enhanced 911 Operation
Programs *10-11 and *10-12 Overview
Programs 10-11 and 10-12 assign which QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, or
PESU standard telephone ports are connected to the E911 interface unit.
Important!
Program 04 Directory Number data must be blank for E911 QSTU2, KSTU2,
RSTU2, or RSTU ports.
Program *10-91 E911 Interdigit Timer
Initialized Default: 15 seconds

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Interdigit Timer = 91
01~15 seconds
Interdigit Timer
seconds
Program *10-91 Overview
*10-91 assigns the time allowed to dial each digit after dialing 9 when using the E911 feature. This
time will affect the time that LCR or CO Line dial tone is returned when dialing 9. However, a user
can dial a 9+ (non-911) calls normally before receiving LCR or CO line dial tone and the DK will
route the call appropriately.
System & Station
Program *10-92 E911 Pause Before Send Timer
Initialized Default: 0 - No pause

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Pause Timer = 92
0 = No pause
1 = 1.5 second pause
2 = 3 second pause
Pause Timer
seconds
Program *10-92 Overview
*10-92 assigns the time the DK will wait before sending the Station Primary Directory Number to
the E911 SLT port after the E911 SLT port answers.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-43

System & Station
Program 12 System Assignments, Basic Timing
Program 12 System Assignments, Basic Timing
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default:
Program Timing
Code 1
15 secs.
Code 3
1 min.
Code 4
2 secs.
Code 5
0 secs.
Code 8
1 min.
Code 9
4 secs.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1, 3~5, 8, 9
DATA = Enter ring down time (00~60)
Enter program code from
SELECT CODE = Enter the 1 digit code which
the table below.
corresponds to the time listed in the table below.
For Program Codes 8 and 9, the LCD responds with
LINE TIME =, instead of SELECT CODE =.
Program
Required
Function
Code
Time
Code
Code
1
Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer (Release 4.0)
XX
XX = 2 digits. 00~60 secs.
Pause Timing
1
1.5 sec
3
(Speed Dial)
2
3.0 sec.
1
0.5 sec.
4
Flash Timing
2
2.0 sec. (Not used in U.S.)
4
0.2 sec.
0
no pause
Pause After Flash
5
1
1.5 sec.
(Voice Path Delay)
2
3.0 sec.
7
SLT Toll Restriction DTMF Receiver time after Dial 9
XX
XX = 01~30 sec.
0
no disconnect timer
DNIS Ext. Network, External Call Forward, and DISA
1
4 min. disconnect
8
Disconnect Timer for Loop Start Lines
2
10 min. disconnect
3
20 min. disconnect
QRCU3/K4RCU3/RRCS/BRCS DTMF Inter-digital
9
XX
XX = 01~09 secs.
Release Time (Standard Phone)
Program 12 Overview
This program assigns system times for ring down, disconnecting calls, pause times, flash times,
auto attendant, DISA, Call Forward External, and DNIS and DTMF receiving decoding.
Code 1: Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer
This feature is available for Release 4.0 and higher. Code 1 assigns the number of seconds that a
Hotline or Emergency standard telephone waits after going off-hook before automatically ringing
a preassigned directory number. If a valid feature access code or [DN] is dialed prior to the ring
down timer expiration, then ring down does not occur. Ring down applies only to standard
telephone ports, not electronic or digital telephone ports. Ring down destination numbers are
assigned in Program *38.
3-44
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 12 System Assignments, Basic Timing
Code 3: Pause Timing
Code 3 enables station users to program short and long pauses in Speed Dial numbers. Applies to
pauses inserted in Speed Dial numbers used for both telephone voice calls and data calls from data
interface units. The short pause length can be set system wide for either 1.5 or 3 seconds with this
program. The long pause is always 10 seconds.
Code 4: Flashing Timing
When on a CO line, a station user can press the )ODVK button (or enter access code &QI7UQ )
and the line opens (flash) for 2 seconds, 0.2 seconds (not used in the USA), or 0.5 seconds
depending on this assignment. This choice reflects whether to disconnect and regain dial tone (2
seconds), or to use PBX or Centrex features which require a flash signal (0.5 seconds). It also
applies to flashes inserted when dialing via Data Interface Units (DIUs).
Code 5: Pause After Flash
Some COs or Centrex facilities require a period of time after a flash signal before they can accept
dialing signals. A selection of pause timing is available to automatically delay any dialing signals
after flash. This timing applies to Speed Dial calls (with flash signals between the telephone
number digits) as well as to manual dialing.
Code 7: Toll Restriction Timing
This represents the time that a DTMF receiver is held for Toll Restriction after dialing a CO line
access code from a standard telephone.
System & Station
Code 8: DNIS Ext. Network External, Call Forward, and DISA Disconnect Timer for Loop
Start LInes
Disconnects DISA, Call Forward External and/or DNIS Telephone Network routed calls when
made on loop start lines. Calls can lock-up (keep busy indefinitely) if the CO does not send a
disconnect signal (CPC or AR) when the caller hangs up. This timer prevents loop start lines from
locking up by disconnecting the call automatically when the timer expires, 4, 10, or 20 minutes
from the start of the call. Callers will hear a warning tone and can reset the timer repeatedly by
dialing "0". This disconnect feature is only needed for loop start lines.
Code 9: QRCU3/K4RCU3/K5RCU/K5RCU2/RRCS/BRCS DTMF Receiver Inter-digital
Release Time
With Code 9, one channel of the QRCU3, K4RCU, K5RCU, K5RCU2, RRCS or BRCS Dual-tone
Multi-frequency (DTMF) receiver is seized when it is needed for the decoding process, such as for
a standard telephone with a DTMF dial pad. When placing outgoing calls with DTMF standard
telephones, the talk path to the outside party is not "cut-through" until the DTMF receiver circuit is
released. The DTMF receiver channel's release time can be programmed for between one and nine
seconds (initialized timing is four seconds)--this is the time it takes to release the DTMF receiver
circuit after the last digit is dialed.
The choice of timing is a trade-off between CO line time to connect and user speed. If the time is
too long, the outside called party may answer before the voice path is "cut-through," and the caller
is not heard. If the time is too short, a standard telephone user inputting DTMF tones could be cut
off prematurely from using other features, such as Speed Dial or Toll Restriction.
Standard telephones can also defeat Toll Restriction if the seize time is too short and they are not
required to dial outgoing calls via LCR. Toshiba recommends that standard telephones should
always be required to dial outgoing calls via LCR to prevent them from defeating Toll Restriction.
Note
If no digits are dialed after accessing an outgoing CO line, the DTMF receiver remains
seized for 15 seconds and then drops; however, the line remains connected.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-45

System & Station
Program 13 Defining the Message Center
Program 13 Defining the Message Center
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: No port assigned

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
PORT = Station Logical Port Number
SELECT 6~9 are not used.
Enter the station logical port number of the station
to be defined as the Message Center.
For RS-232 SMDI and In Band (DTMF) voice mail
integration, enter the lowest QSTU2/KSTU2/
RSTU2 standard telephone port connected to the
VM device (see notes below.)
Port Number
Program 13 Overview
This program assigns a station as the Message Center.
Each digital, electronic and standard telephone can receive a maximum of four message waiting
indications per [PDN] and each [PhDN] owned by the station. One of these four is reserved for the
designated Message Center. The Message Center should be the customer's main answering
position.
Typically, the Message Center is a voice mail device, attendant console, a digital or electronic
telephone with a DSS console (DDSS or HDSS), or an add-on module. If incoming traffic to a
DDSS or HDSS console attendant is heavy, another station can be assigned as the Message Center.
Notes
The Message Center is allowed to perform "Message Waiting," even if disallowed on all other
stations.
Assign the Message Center to the customer's main answering position: a station or the lowest
port (in VM group) of the customer's voice mail device (see Program 31 for voice mail group
port assignments), whichever the customer specifies.
When using RS-232 SMDI or DTMF voice mail interface, all stations must also be assigned to
the message center port in Program 32 and Program 13. This should be the lowest standard
telephone port (QSTU2/KSTU2/RSTU2) connected to the VM device. This is also the same
(lowest) port assigned in the Program 31 VM group and the lowest standard telephone port
assigned in the Program 40 VM Distributed Hunt Group. Do not assign the VM DH Group
port number (900~915) as the message center port.
3-46
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options
Program 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: All LEDs are Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Program Code
LED Buttons = CO line
Press 6FUROO to advance or 3DJH to go
Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the
back.
table below. When you are finished, all LEDs with
To advance the CO line range, press 6FUROO
an "X" should be lit.
located beneath the LCD. Press 3DJH for a
lower range.
Processor Type
CO Line Range
Processor Type
CO Line Range
DK14
001~004
B1CU
001~032
DK40i
001~012
B2CAU/BU
001~120
RCTUA
001~016
B3CAU/BU
001~120
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
B5CAU/BU
001~200
RCTUC/D
001~144
RCTUE/F
001~200
System & Station
Line
de
m Co
Program
LED On
LED Off
rag
LED
Pro
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CPC on AR VM
0
Calls and Voice
Detect Ignore
Calls
1
CO/DID/Tie Line
DP
DTMF
Signal
CO/DID/Tie Dial
2
Pulse Rate
20 PPS
10 PPS
(Pulse per sec.)
3
AR Hold
Detect
Ignore
ESS
4
Crossbar
AR Timing
(electronic)
95 msec.
450 msec.
Tandem CO Line
5
Not
Connection with
Enabled
Enabled
Station Dropout
7
Forced Account
Not
Enabled
Code
Enabled
No DTMF
DTMF
8
Operation After CO
receiver
receiver
Line Flash
After Flash
After Flash
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-47

System & Station
Program 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options
Program 15 Overview
This program specifies operational options on a line by line basis.
Code 0: Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail or Voice Calls
On loop start CO lines, some COs send the AR (Automatic Release) or CPC (Calling party
Control) signal after an external party hangs up (typically 1~15 seconds) to disconnect a loop start
line. An AR/CPC signal is a 95 or 450-millisecond open of the CO line loop. If the CO sends this
signal after an external party hangs up and before the VM/auto attendant transfers a call, D tone
will be sent to the voice mail port (Program 30, LED 15), releasing and clearing that port for
another call. This feature is active on all voice calls.
When a station is disconnected from a CO line call by the AR/CPC signal, its LCD will display
"CO LINE HANG UP". The line can be disconnected anytime by the AR/CPC signal during the
"talk state" of a call. CO line calls disconnected by the AR/CPC signal will be represented on the
SMDR report by a "*" next to the CO line number. Code 0 does not apply to ground start lines,
which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs up. The Voice Mail device must
recognize the "D" tone as a disconnect signal.
Important!
This option cannot always be used because some COs may send unreliable AR/CPC
signaling or no AR/CPC signaling for loop start lines.
Enable AR/CPC-Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends
the AR/CPC-Hold signal.
Code 1: CO Outgoing Signal
Each line can be independently assigned to have either Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual-tone Multi-
frequency (DTMF) signaling on outgoing calls toward the Central Office.
If a line is set for DP operation, the 7RQH 'LDO 6HOHFW button must be programmed on stations
that must send DTMF tones over the lines.
If Tie or DID lines are programmed for dial pulse, turn LED 11 On in Program 30 for each
station port assigned to the DID or Tie line.
Code 2: Line Pulse (DP) Rate
If a line is assigned DP signaling, the rate can be either 20 or 10 pulses per second (PPS). Some
Central Offices do not reliably accept 20 PPS.
Code 3: Automatic Release (AR) From Hold/Transfer
The Automatic Release (AR) signal sometimes called Calling Party Control (CPC) or Supervised
Loop Control. This signal consists of a momentary open of the loop start CO line provided by
some COs--the duration of the open depends on the CO. If a CO line is programmed (Programs
15-0 and 15-3) to detect the AR/CPC signal, the DK system drops the line when the CO sends the
signal (typically 1~15 seconds after the outside party hangs up). The system sends D Tone to voice
mail ports to drop the ports when AR/CPC is detected.
The Strata DK system disconnects a loop start CO line voice call and displays "CO LINE HANG
UP" on the station's LCD anytime the AR/CPC signal is detected and the CO line has Programs
15-0 and 15-3 enabled.
On loop start CO lines, some Central Offices send an AR/CPC signal. If the system CO line is on
hold (or being transferred to another station or Auto Attendant port) when the AR/CPC signal is
sent, it is automatically disconnected if this option is activated.
3-48
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options
Two-CO line DISA calls always release when AR/CPC is sent. DISA release via AR/CPC is not
related to this program. CO line calls disconnected by the AR/CPC signal will be represented on
the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) report by a "*" next to the CO line number. Code 3
does not apply to ground start lines, which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs
up. See Important! note in earlier paragraph on Code 0.
DK424 only: If loop start lines are programmed to detect the AR/CPC-Hold signal, they do not
remain on the attendant console loop keys when the attendant console sets up trunk-to-trunk
connection. If programmed to ignore AR/CPC-Hold, they remain on the attendant console Hold
loop keys.
Important!
Enable AR/CPC-Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends
the AR/CPC-Hold signal.
Code 4: Automatic Release (AR) Time
AR/CPC signaling timing is different depending on the Central Office equipment. An assignment
choice exists between Crossbar or ESS Central Offices.
For more information on AR/CPC, see the preceding Code 0 and Code 3 sections.
Code 5: Tandem Line Connection
Once a Two-line Conference call is made by an electronic, digital or (in R3.2) standard telephone
users or voice mail ports, the user or voice mail device may drop out of the conference and leave
the two lines connected. The choice exists for each line that may have this capability. This option
System & Station
must be enabled to allow CO lines (ground/loop/Tie/DID) to be used for outgoing DISA, Call
Forward External, and Tie/DID/DNIS External Network routing calls.
With Release 3.2, a station which set up a tandem call and then dropped out can dial the pickup
code ( ) to retrieve the tandem call. If more than one tandem connection is set up by a
station, picks up the call with the lowest CO line as a priority.
Prior to Release 3.2, standard telephones could set up tandem calls, but they could not drop out. If
they tried to drop out, the call would ring back to the standard phone.
Code 7: Forced Account Code (Verified or Non-verified)
If the Forced Account Code feature is used, (see Program 30) a station user is required to enter an
Account Code before a CO line call can be completed. A choice exists for each line.
Code 8: Operation After CO Line Flash
If a standard telephone user is on an existing CO line call and flashes the hookswitch on their
telephone, a Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) receiver channel may or may not be connected,
depending on this assignment. If the CO line is a rotary dial only type, the QRCU2, K4RCU3,
K5RCU, K5RCU2, BRCS or RRCS must be seized after flash when dialing from DTMF standard
telephones. The QRCU2, K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3, RRCS or BRCS will decode the dialed
tones and send dial pulses to the line.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-49

System & Station
Program *15 CO Line Tenant Assignments
Program *15 CO Line Tenant Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: All CO lines assigned to Tenant 1

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = CO Line Number
TENANT = Assign the CO line to a tenant
(see legend below)
To add a line range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
Processor Type
CO Line Range
Tenants Supported
Processor Type
CO Line Range
Tenants Supported
DK14
001~004
2
B1CU
001~032
4
DK40i
001~012
2
B2CAU/BU
001~120
4
RCTUA
001~016
2
B3CAU/BU
001~120
4
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
4
B5CAU/BU
001~200
4
RCTUC/D
001~144
4
RCTUE/F
001~200
4
CO
Tenant Group
CO
Tenant Group
CO
Tenant Group
Line
Line
Line
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Program *15 Overview
A system CO line can be shared by more than one business tenant for the purpose of separating CO
line ringing pickup and Night Transfer. Program 15 assigns CO line business tenants.
3-50
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)
Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: All CO lines assigned to the Dial 9 group

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = CO Line Group (see legend)
LED Buttons = CO line
Only enter the last two digits of the CO line Group,
Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the
or enter for Dial 9 group.
table below. When you are finished, all LEDs with
an "X" should be lit.
Press 6FUROO to advance or 3DJH to go back.
To advance the CO line range, press 6FUROO
located beneath the LCD. Press 3DJH for a lower
range.After programming, press:
9RO to turn all LEDs On
9RO to turn all LEDs Off
0RGH and CO line number, then to display and
advance
Processor Type
CO Line Range
CO Line Groups
Processor Type
CO Line Range
CO Line Groups
DK14
001~004
01~04
B1CU
001~032
01~04
System & Station
DK40i
001~012
01~08
B2CAU/BU
001~120
01~16
RCTUA
001~016
01~08
B3CAU/BU
001~120
01~16
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
01~08
B5CAU/BU
001~200
01~16
RCTUC/D
001~144
01~16
RCTUE/F
001~200
01~16
CO Line Groups
Line
LED
Number
Dial
9(00)
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-51

System & Station
Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)
Program 16 Overview
Use Program 16 to assign each CO line to a CO line group or a general "dial 9" group. A general
group for outside calling is available with a "dial 9" access code as the initialized state for all lines.
Lines can be accessed with a dialing code instead of with a CO /LQH button. This is useful for
WATS lines or other facilities, and is heavily used in Least Cost Routing and Pooled Line Button
assignments.
Do not attempt to assign a line to more than one group. A line need not be assigned to a group. If
lines are not used, they should be taken out of all groups, including the "dial 9" group. Automatic
Busy Redial (ABR) will not function if unconnected (unused) lines are assigned to a line group.
Tie Lines
If you assign a Tie line for Toll Restriction and LCR on tandem calls (Release 4.3 and higher),
assign a class of service in Programs 30, 40, 41, 43, 48, and 56. Program ports 900~916 to match
the Tie line group numbers 01~16, respectively.
3-52
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 17 DID/Tie Line Options
Program 17 DID/Tie Line Options
Processor Type:
DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: LED 01/02 Off, LED 03/04 On

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter Line No. that will be DID or Tie line.
Light LED Buttons 01~08 as noted in table below
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
Line Numbers:
LED/Button
X
LED On
LED Off
09, 10, and
Not used at this time.
14~20
08
DID/Tie line DTMF digits with tones
DID/Tie line DTMF digits without tones
DID/Tie line does not receives ANI (DID Program *09 and
07
DID/Tie line receives ANI and routes per Programs 71 and 72
Tie Program 04)
06
Telephone LCD priority is ANI
Telephone LCD priority is DNIS
DID/Tie line routes per DNIS assignments:
DID/Tie line routes per Non-DNIS assignments:
05
(Programs 71 and 72)
(DID Program *09 and Tie Program 04)
System & Station
04
DID/Tie no second dial tone
DID/Tie second dial tone
03
DID line Auto Camp-on busy
DID line no Camp-on busy
02
Wink Start for Tie or DID
Immediate Start for Tie or DID
Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line Page access for
No Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line No
01
Tie/DID DNIS lines
Page access for Tie/DID DNIS lines
Program 17 Overview
Program 17 assigns lines for Tie and DID operation.
Important!
When normal Tie/DID lines are configured with Program 71 and 72 DNIS
assignments, turn LED 05 On and LED 06, 07 and 08 Off for those lines - then
program the lines as required in Programs 71 and 72.
Notes
Each REMU, PEMU, RDDU or TDDU PCB reduces the station port capacity by four station
ports, each RDTU Tie/DID line channel reduces the system's station port capacity by one port.
Always install Tie or DID line PCBs in slot numbers that are higher than station PCB slot
numbers (see Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration in the Strata DK I&M Manual).
Incoming Tie line calls camp-on only if Program 71 assignments are used.
Copy one record sheet for each group of Tie/DID lines that have different Program 17
parameters.
LEDs 09, 10 and 14~20
Not used at this time.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-53

System & Station
Program 17 DID/Tie Line Options
LED 08: ANI/DNIS Digit Format
Most DID/Tie lines with ANI/DNIS digit format include tone with digits (LED 08 On). One
exception, as of this writing, Sprint provides DNIS without ANI and does not include tone with
digits - in this case LED 08 should be turned Off.
Examples of this signal format are: ANI digitsDNIS digits and DNIS digits.
DID/Tie lines with normal digit format does not include tone with digits (LED 08 Off).
LED 07: ANI Receive Line Option
If a Tie or DID line should receive ANI information, LED 07 should be turned On for that line. If
the Tie/DID line receives ANI digits only (no DNIS digits) LED 06, 07, and 08 should be On and
LED 05 should be Off. See Program 71-1, address 199, 299, and 499 for Tie/DID ANI only call
routing assignments. If a line receives ANI and DNIS, LEDs 05, 07 and 08 must be On; LED 06
can be On or Off.
LED 06: Telephone LCD Display Option ANI or DNIS
Telephone LCDs can display ANI or DNIS information as a priority when Tie/DID lines or ISDN
channels receive both ANI and DNIS digits. This system-wide option determines if ANI or DNIS
information should display on telephone LCDs when Tie/DID lines provide both ANI and DNIS
information together on incoming calls.
It is not possible to display both ANI and DNIS information simultaneously on the same call but
the 3DJH button on the LCD telephone can be used to toggle between the ANI and DNIS
information when an ANI/DNIS line is ringing the telephone. After answering the call, it is not
possible to toggle the LCD display between ANI and DNIS
LED 05: DNIS Line/Non-DNIS Line
This option assigns Tie and/or DID lines to follow Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Program assignments.
Turn LED 05 On for DNIS only or ANI with DNIS lines.
Turn LED 05 Off and LED 07 and 08 On for ANI only lines which should route per the last
address assignment in Program 71.
Important!
Any Tie or DID line can be assigned to use the features of Program 71 and 72. If
normal Tie/DID lines are assigned Name Tags, External Routing, selective Day/
Day2/Night Routing: In Program 17, Turn LED 05 On and turn LED 06, 07 and 08
Off for those lines - then program the lines as required in Program 71 and 72. In this
case, Program *09 (DID) and Program 04 (Tie) do not apply to these lines.
LED 04: DID/Tie Second Dial Tone Option
If the second dial tone option is selected (LED 04 Off), callers calling in on the DK DID or Tie
lines will hear dial tone after accessing the DK Tie/DID lines. Second Dial tone will not be sent to
callers if this option is not selected (LED 04 On).
Important!
Normally, Tie lines require a second dial tone (LED 04 Off) and DID lines should
not return a second dial tone (LED 04 On). The initialized data is set for DID lines
so this data must be changed when installing Tie lines if second dial tone is
required.
LED 03/04 applies to REMU, PEMU, TDDU, RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines.
3-54
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 17 DID/Tie Line Options
LED 03: DID Camp-on/Busy
Turn LED 03 On if DID line callers should hear ringback tone and camp on to busy stations when
calling busy stations. Turn LED 03 Off if the DID callers should hear busy tone when calling busy
stations. Analog Tie lines will not camp-on to busy stations.
It is recommended to turn LED 03 On for all DID lines. To provide Camp-on-busy over RDTU Tie
line calls, configure Tie lines as DID lines in Program 41-2; LED 03 must be on for the lines in
Program 17. This is allowed because Tie and DID signalling is the same for Tie and DID T1 lines.
Also, both Tie and DID lines that route per Program 71 DNIS assignments will camp on busy if
LED 03 is turned On. Tie lines that route per Program 04 will not camp on busy.
LED 03/04 applies to REMU, PEMU, TDDU, RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines.
LED 02: Wink/Immediate
Applies to REMU, TDDU, PEMU, and RDDU Tie/DID lines only. Select Wink Start or
Immediate Start for the entered Tie or DID line. See Program 41-2 for RDTU Tie/DID Wink/
Immediate Start assignments or RDTU T1 Tie lines configured as DID lines in Program 42-1.
LED 01: Page/Handsfree Answerback
Allows (LED 01 On) or denies (LED 01 Off) the following features when connecting the Strata
DK to another Key/PBX. LED 01 applies to both Tie and DID lines when programmed with
Program 71 assignments.
If using a private network, then turn LED 01 On to allow Page access on Tie and DID lines
System & Station
programmed with DNIS assignments in Program 71 (Code #039).
Per FCC regulations, public telephone network, Tie, DID, or DNIS lines must always be restricted
(LED 01 Off) from Page and Handsfree Answerback.
Callers on the far-end Key/PBX system can access the Strata DK system external and/or
Station All Call Page over DID and/or Tie lines programmed with DNIS assignment (Program
10-2, LED 15 and Program 71-1, Code #039) for DID/Tie DNIS assignments. Tie lines only
that route per Program 04 can dial any Page Zone or Page Group access code.
Callers on the far-end Key/PBX system can make voice announce calls to stations on the near-
end Strata DK. This option applies only Tie lines (not DID lines) that route per Program 04 or
Program 71. You must program the Strata DK as "Voice First" in Program 10-1, LED 01; or,
the far end can dial "1" after dialing the [DN] on tone first systems.
Callers on the far-end Strata DK can answer Tie lines calls (not DID lines) from the Far End
Key/PBX in the hands free mode. You must program the near-end Strata DK as "Voice First"
in Program 10-1, LED 01, or the far-end caller must dial "1" to switch from ring to voice
signaling.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-55

System & Station
Program *17 DID Intercept Port Number (Vacant or Wrong Number)
Program *17 DID Intercept Port Number (Vacant or
Wrong Number)
Processor Type:
DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: No data

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = DID Line Number
HUNT TO = Enter Intercept Station
Logical Port No.
Intercept does not apply to Tie line calls.
LED Button 01 enters blanks.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
Intercept Port
DID Line
Intercept Port
Processor Type
DID Line Range
Processor Type
Range
Range
Range
DK14
N/A
N/A
B1CU
001~032
000~055
DK40i
001~012
000~027
B2CAU/BU
001~120
000~111
RCTUA, RCTUB
001~016
000~031
B3CAU/BU
001~120
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
000~079
RCTUC/D
001~144
000~239
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
001~200
000~335
Intercept Port
Intercept Port
Intercept Port
DID LIne Number
DID LIne Number
DID LIne Number
Number
Number
Number
Program *17 Overview
DID and/or DNIS calls in which callers have dialed a vacant or invalid port can be routed to
intercept ports assigned with this program. Each DID and/or DNIS line can have its own intercept
port. In all cases, Intercept does not apply to Tie lines.
3-56
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 19 Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment
Program 19 Alternate Background Music Source Slot
Assignment
Processor Type:
DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs (not used for DK14. See Program 10-2, LED 10)
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: Slot 11
more codes

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On
...or
SELECT = 1
Run Program 91-2
Enter the Slot Number (11~78)
Program 19 Overview
The PCB connected to the alternate BGM source can be in any slot. Use this program to designate
that slot. LEDs 09 and 10 in Program 10-2 should be Off if the source is connected to a QSTU2,
KSTU2, PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU. (Only circuit 2 of these PCBs can support the BGM
source.)
The alternate BGM source sends BGM to the external speakers and telephone (digital and
electronic) speakers. If an alternate BGM source is used, the Music-on-Hold (MOH) source
System & Station
connected to an RCTU will continue to play for lines and stations that are on hold.
Important!
If the alternate BGM source is not connected to a PEKU, PESU or PSTU, RSTU,
RSTU2, or RDSU, assign Slot 11 as data in Program 19. If BGM is connected to
circuit 2 of QSTU2 or KSTU2, assign slot 13 as data in Program 19. This ensures
that all PSTU or RSTU ports function normally. Digital / electronic telephones or
RSIU PCBs installed in Slot 11 are not affected by this assignment.
PEKU/PESU
If using a PEKU, wire the BGM source to circuit 3 and turn LED 09 On (Program 10-2) to enable
the BGM connection.
If using a PESU, wire the BGM source to circuit 8 and turn LED 10 On (Program 10-2) to enable
the BGM connection.
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU
If using a QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU, wire the BGM source to circuit 2
and turn LED 09 and 10 Off (Program 10-2). Also, an isolation transformer may be required if
connecting the source these PCBs. See Chapter 10 Peripheral Installation in the Installation and
Maintenance Manual for isolation transformer installation instructions.
PDKU
BGM cannot be connected to the PDKU.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-57

System & Station
Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration
Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit
Configuration
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: LED 17 On, all others Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = PDKU/PDSU Station Logical Port
LED Buttons 01~06 define data port type;
Number that is connected to PDIIU-DS or to
LED Buttons 17~20 assign data port to
DKT with PDIU-DI or RPCI-DI
security group.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
DK40i Base, PDKU, RDSU, KCDU Digital Port Number
LED
X
LED On
LED Off
20
Data Security Group 4
Not Included
19
Data Security Group 2
Not Included
18
Data Security Group 3
Not Included
17
Data Security Group 1
Not Included
12~16
Not Used
11
RPCI-DI DNIS Sent
RPCI-DI DNIS Not Sent
10
RPCI-DI Caller ID/ANI Sent
RPCI-DI Caller ID/ANI Not Sent
07~09
Not Used
06
DTR Pulse with Data Release
No DTR Pulse
05
Auto Pause Behind PBX
No Auto Pause
04
PDIU-DS Connected
PDIU-DI/RPCI-DI Connected
03
PDIU-DS to Modem Connection
PDIU-DS to other type DCE or DTE
02
AT Commands and Result Codes
AT Commands Only
01
PDIU-DS or RPCI Connected
No PDIU-DS or RPCI Connected
Program 20 Overview
Program 20 identifies the digital station ports connected to RPCI/PDIU and the type of PDIU
connected.
RPCIs have two modes: the Data Switching (DIU mode) and the Application Program Interface
(or TAPI) mode. In the DIU mode, the RPCI operates as a PDIU-DI (Integrated Data Interface
Unit); all Program 20 options apply except LED 10 and LED 11 - which only apply to the RPCI in
TAPI mode. In TAPI mode the RPCI does not require Program 20 assignments, except for LED 10
and/or LED 11 if ANI, DNIS, and/or Caller ID must be sent from the RPCI-DI to the PC to which
it is connected.
3-58
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration
Notes
RPCIs and PDIUs cannot be connected to PDKU1 circuit 8, but can be connected to all eight
PDKU2 circuits. RPCIs and PDIUs that support data switching cannot be connected to PDKU
in all slots. See the Strata DK I&M Manual, DK424 Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration, Tables
4-4 and 4-5, Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration to identify which slots can support RPCIs and
DIUs and Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation for additional hardware information. DK40i
slots 17 and 18 do not support data switching.
If a PC is connected to the RPCI or PDIU, set the communication mode escape sequences in
the PC communication software "Modem Initialization" character sequence. This ensures the
escape sequence is restored in case the RPCI Telephone or PDIU is unplugged temporarily.
RPCI and PDIU-DS units that mostly do data switching, can be connected to ports associated
with PDKU1 circuits 1~7 only. All PDKU2 circuits, 1~8, support RPCIs and PDIUs. RDSU
digital circuits 5~8 support RPCI and PDIUs.
Each PDIU-DS requires a separate digital port.
If a PDIU-DS (Stand-alone Data Interface Unit) is connected to a modem, refer to Modem
Setup Recommendations in the PC/Data Communication section of Chapter 12 Peripheral
Installation of the Strata DK I&M Manual.
Typical LED Settings for Program 20
RCPI-DI/PDIU-DI Connected to a terminal or personal computer--LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On;
all other LEDs Off.
System & Station
PDIU-DS Connected to a Printer: LEDs 01, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
PDIU-DS Connected to a Modem: LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
LEDs 17~20: Data Security Groups
Data security groups can be set to block data calls between RPCI/DIUs. RPCI/DIUs can only
make data calls to RPCI/DIUs in the same security group. LEDs 17~20 assign the RPCI/DIU to
the appropriate security group: light LED 17 for Group 1; LED 18, for Group 3; LED 19, for
Group 2; and LED 20, for Group 4. If an RPCI-DI is used in the Application Program Interface
(TAPI) mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, this option is not applicable.
LEDs 12~16
Not used at this time.
LED 11: RPCI-DI DNIS to PC Option
DNIS Number or NAME tag information that is sent to a telephone can be sent, or blocked, from
the telephone's RPCI-DI, RS-232 output. If DNIS information should be sent from the
Telephone's RPCI-DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected, turn LED 11 On; if this
information should not be sent to the PC, turn LED 11 Off.
LED 10: RPCI-DI Caller ID and ANI to PC Option
Caller ID and ANI information that is sent to a telephone can be sent, or blocked, from the
telephone's RPCI-DI, RS-232 output. If Caller ID and ANI information should be sent from the
RPCI-DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected, turn LED 10 On; if this information
should not be sent to the PC, turn LED 10 Off. This option does not apply to PDIUs because they
can not send ANI, Caller ID, or DNIS numbers.
LEDs 07~09
Not used at this time.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-59

System & Station
Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration
LED 06: DTR Pulse
LED 06 should always be Off.
LED 06 should be off for all PDIU-DS, RPCI-DIs, or PDIU-DIs. (Refer to Chapter 10 Peripheral
Installation for more PDIU-DS/modem pool information).
LED 05: Auto Pause Behind PBX
Turn LED 05 On to enable Auto Pause Behind PBX. This inserts the Auto Pause after a Centrex or
PBX access code is dialed by a DIU or RPCI. A CO line must be assigned in Program 42-0, and
must have an access code assigned in Program 42 (1~8). Pause time is determined by Program 12-
3. Also, when Auto Pause Behind PBX is enabled, the Auto Pause is inserted after the CO line
access code is dialed (by the DIU).
If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX, Centrex, or a Central Office that is slow to return
dial tone after seizure, enable Auto Pause Behind PBX to insert a pause before and after the PBX
or Centrex access code is dialed by the DIU or RPCI. Also, light LED 05 to automatically insert a
pause before network telephone numbers are autodialed by DIUs or RPCIs.
LED 04: PDIU-DS or PDIU-DI/RPCI-DI Connection
Set LED 04 On if a PDIU-DS is connected to the digital port.
Important!
If LED 04 is turned on for a telephone port, that telephone cannot be called.
Set LED 04 Off if a PDIU-DI or RPCI-DI or any type of telephone is connected. In this case, the
digital telephone supporting this PCB may require the Data Call (DATA), Data Release (DRLS),
and/or Modem buttons assigned in Program 39. Also, if an RPCI-DI is used in the Application
Program Interface (TAPI) mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, set LED 04 Off.
Note
The pause length is set in Program 12-3, and lines behind PBX/Centrex are assigned in
Programs 42-0 and 42-1~8.
LED 03: RPCI/PDIU-DS to Modem Connection
If a PDIU-DS is connected to the digital port, identify whether the RPCI/PDIU-DS is connected to
a modem (LED 03 On) or not connected to a modem (LED 03 Off). If not connected to a modem,
the connected device can be a DCE or DTE. This feature is not necessary for RPCI/PDIU-DIs,
because they are not normally connected to modems.
LED 02: AT Commands and Result Codes
Enable this feature (LED 02 On) if the RPCI or DIU must respond to AT commands and return
result codes in the Data Switching command mode. RPCI/DIU "AT" dialing commands and
"result" codes are listed in the RPCI-DI and the Data Interface User Guide.
If the DIU is connected to a modem, LED 02 should be On. If the RPCI/DIU is connected to a
printer, LED 02 should be Off. If an RPCI-DI is used in the Application Program Interface (TAPI)
mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, this option is not applicable.
If the feature is not enabled (LED 02 Off), the RPCI/DIU only responds to AT dialing commands
(ATDT, ATD, and ATDD) and does not return result codes. If the DIU is connected to a terminal or
a personal computer with communication software, LED 02 should be On.
LED 01: RPCI and PDIU Connection
Enable this feature (LED 01 On) if there is a PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI or PDIU-DS connected to the
digital port. Each RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI uses the same digital port as the telephone it is attached to.
This feature is not applicable if an RPCI-DI is used only in TAPI, and not DIU mode.
3-60
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments
Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Digital Station Logical Port
Standard Telephone Modem Port
Number (see notes below)
Number (see notes below)
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Logical Port No.
Modem Port No.
Assignment 1
Assignment 2
System & Station
Assignment 3
Assignment 4
Assignment 5
Assignment 6
Assignment 7
Assignment 8
Assignment 9
Assignment 10
Notes
Digital Ports include: DK14 KSU, DK40i Base KSU, QCDU2, KCDU, PDKU2, and RDSU
digital ports.
Standard telephone ports include: QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, and PESU
standard telephone ports.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-61

System & Station
Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments
Program 21 Overview
This program assigns modems to the system modem pool. Program 21 identifies modems
connected to standard telephone ports (line side of modem) and digital/PDIU-DS ports
(RS-232 side of modem). With data security groups (Program 20, LEDs 17~20) and the call the
blocking feature (Program 31, LED 04), modem access can be denied or allowed to data users.
Notes
PDIU-DS must be installed on PDKUs in slots designated for DIU operation. (See the
appropriate Configuration chapter and Chapter 8 T1 in the Strata DK I&M Manual.)
When modems are connected to standard telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU,
RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2, QSTU2) the Executive/ Privacy Override blocking feature (Program
31, LED 18) should be enabled for the modem RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2
and QSTU2 ports for data security. The LED 18 feature should be disabled to enable callers to
switch from voice to data, or vice versa.
Digital telephones with RCPI-DIs or PDIU-DIs that must access modems from a pool require
a 0RGHP button assigned in Program 39.
PDIU-DS ports that are connected to modems in the modem pool should be set with LEDs 01,
02, 03, and 04 in Program 20.
If a modem connected to PDIU-DS is connected to a telephone network line instead of a
standard telephone station port, Program 21 should not be used.
Use Program 22 to assign modem/PDIU-DS stations to hunt sequences.
DIUs can be connected to any ports associated with PDKU circuits, except for ports associated
with circuit 8 on a PDKU1. All PDKU2, KCDU, and QCDU circuits can support DIUs. DIUs
can also be connected to any digital circuit in the DK14 or DK40i KSU.
DIUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU1 circuits 1~7 only. All PDKU2
circuits, 1~8, can support RPCI/DIUs. RDSU circuits 5~8 can support RPCI/DIUs.
3-62
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 22 RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls
Program 22 RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data
Calls
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Does not assign "hunt-to" ports to any port

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Port Number (see legend below)
HUNT TO = (see legend below)
Enter the RPCI/DIU digital port number of the "hunt-from" station.
Enter the "hunt-to" RPCI/DIU digital port number.
Enter the port number(s) to which class of service must be assigned.
LED Button 01 deletes a digit from the "hunt-to"
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
port.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
System & Station
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Program 22 Overview
This program assigns computer and Data Interface Unit (DIU) station hunt ports for data calls. If a
RPCI/PDIU station (printer, modem, etc.) is busy, data station hunting allows the data call to hunt
to an alternate RPCI/PDIU station assigned in this program. If the hunted RPCI/PDIU station is
busy, the system will ring the next "hunt-to" station, and so on. If all RPCI/PDIU stations in the
"hunt-to" sequence are busy, then the data caller will receive a busy tone. Toshiba recommends
that all PDIU-DS station ports grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling/server configuration
be placed into a hunt-sequence arrangement with Program 22.
Notes
Program 22 applies to RCPI-DI, PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS data calls, not telephone station
voice calls. If programming an RCPI-DI or PDIU-DI station, use the associated DKT logical
port number; the PDIU-DS is programmed using its own unique port number.
When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem(s) assigned to the system modem pool in Program
21, modem hunting is automatic when the user presses the 'DWD &DOO button to transfer a line
call to a modem. However, if the user dials the modem's PDIU-DS's station number, modem
hunting follows the hunt sequence specified in Program 22.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-63

System & Station
Program 23 Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Primary Announcement Assignments
Program 23 Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Primary
Announcement Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: No ports assigned

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1~4
AUTO ATT 1 NO. = Port
Select the Auto Attendant
Enter the standard station logical port
device (digital announcer).
number to which the device will be assigned.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
008~009
B1CU
008~055
DK40i
008~027
B2CAU/BU
008~111
RCTUA
008~031
B3CAU/BU
008~191
RCTUBA/BB
008~079
B5CAU/BU
008~335
RCTUC/D
008~239
RCTUE/F
008~335
Announcement Device
Port Number
1
2
3
4
Program 24 Built-in AA Secondary Announcement
Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: No ports assigned

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1~4
AUTO ATT 2 NO. = Port
Select the Auto Attendant
Enter the standard station logical port
device (digital announcer).
number to which the device will be assigned.
Note
See Program 23 legend for port ranges.
Announcement Device
Port Number
1
2
3
4
3-64
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 25-1 Built-in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time
Programs 23 and 24 Overview
Programs 23 and 24 assign customer-supplied Auto Attendant announcement devices (digital
announcers) to standard telephone ports (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/
RSTS). Use Program 23 to assign devices that deliver primary announcements, dialing options and
greetings heard when callers first call in; also, devices that deliver secondary announcements.
Use Program 24 to offer options to unanswered calls routed back to the Auto Attendant. Up to
eight devices can be connected to a system. See Primary and secondary announcements below:
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Processor Type
Processor Type
Announcements
Announcements
Announcements
Announcements
DK14
1
1
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
4
4
DK40i
4
4
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
4
4
RCTUA, RCTUB
4
4
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
4
4
Any combination is allowed within the maximum limitations. For example, three primary
announcements and one secondary announcement are allowed.
Ports assigned in Programs 23 and 24 should never be assigned with External Auto Attendant
voice mail options in other programs (30, 31, 81~89, etc.)
To allow the built-in Auto Attendant programs to function:
DK424 and DK424i: the RKYS (1, 2, 3, or 4) and BRCS or RRCS must be installed on the RCTU
or BCU PCB;
DK40i: the KKYS (1, 2, or 3) must be installed on the K5RCU;
DK14: the QKYS and QRCU3 must be installed in the DK14 KSU.
System & Station
Overflow stations and delay ring operation is assigned in Programs 81~89.
Program 25-1 Built-in AA Incoming Call Overflow
Time
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: 20 seconds before overflow

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
AATT TIME = Seconds before overflowing
Enter the number of seconds, 12~24.
Program 25-1 Overview
This program sets the time it takes an unanswered incoming Auto Attendant call to overflow to a
preassigned station(s). The time can be anywhere from 12 to 24 seconds--the default is 20
seconds. The overflow station or group of stations is assigned in Programs 81~89.
This overflow time applies to the overflow of incoming Auto Attendant calls to normal CO line
ringing if either a primary announcement device or K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3, RRCS, or
BRCS (DTMF) circuit is not available.
Note
Auto Attendant will not answer when all of the RRCS, BRCS, K5RCU, K5RCU2,
K4RCU3 or QRCU2 circuits or primary announcements are busy.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-65

System & Station
Program 26 Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time
Program 26 Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns an AA Camp-on-Busy Time of 016 seconds to all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Port Number
CAMP-On TIME = AA Camp-on-Busy Time
Enter the number of the called Station
Enter the time in seconds (1~3 digits). The range is
Logical port that needs a Camp-on
011~999 seconds (16.65 minutes).
Busy time assigned.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
(low port high port).
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Camp-on
Camp-on
Camp-on
Camp-on
Port
Port
Port
Port
Time
Time
Time
Time
3-66
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 26 Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time
Program 26 Overview
Note
This program only applies to Auto Attendant (built-in) calls to busy or ringing stations; it
does not apply to ring transfer camp-on time from stations or customer-supplied Auto
Attendant devices; see Program 37 Ring Transfer (Camp-on) recall time.
This program establishes the time it takes for unanswered Auto Attendant calls camped-on to busy
or ringing [DNs] to be routed to other destinations. The time, which is set for the "camped-on to
station", can be set from 011 seconds to 999 seconds. Ring/No Answer call time to idle stations is
fixed at 16 seconds unless Call Forward/No Answer is set at the called station.
The destination that the call can be rerouted to depends on the Auto Attendant application. In Auto
Attendant applications that use just primary announcement devices, the destination is set in
Program 10-3, and can be either back to the primary announcement or the normal ringing pattern
of the line that the call came in on (Programs 81, 84, or 87 for telephone ringing and *81, *82, *83
for [DN] flash. Also see Program 10-3, LEDs 15 and 16 for disconnect time options. In
applications that use secondary announcement devices in addition to primary ones, the rerouted
calls are automatically sent to secondary announcement devices.
This program timer sets the time that Auto Attendant calls to a busy or ringing station will camp-
on before routing back to a primary announcement or to the calling CO line's normal ring pattern.
(See Program 10-3, LED 3 for routing option after Camp-on-Busy). The time set in this program
applies to the called station.
If CF-NA or CF-B/NA is set on a Telephone, the CF-N/A ring timer will have priority over this
16-sec. camp-on-busy timer so the telephone will ring for the duration of the CF-NA timer. Auto
System & Station
Attendant calls to a ring-no-answer or busy station will only forward to one destination, if the CF
destination station has call forward set, the call will camp-on for 16-seconds and then route per the
Auto Attendant flow diagram--the call will not forward a second time to another destination.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-67

System & Station
Program 27 DKT Handset/Headset Receiver Volume Level
Program 27 DKT Handset/Headset Receiver Volume
Level
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: VR=2

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Digital Telephone Logical Port Number
VR = Enter volume level 1~4
Default volume level is 2.
Total DKT Volume Range (VR)
Lowest
Highest
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Volume
Volume
Set VR 1~4 for initial off-hook handset receiver volume level;
VR resets to programmed level (1~4) after each call (on-
hook/off-hook). Each level is equivalent to a 2dB change.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
VR Level
Port
VR Level
Port
VR Level
Port
VR Level
Program 27 Overview
This program sets the initial off-hook volume level for each digital telephone handset and/or
headset. This level can be changed with the digital telephone's volume control button while the
handset or headset is off-hook, but it will return to the default level set in this program after the
handset is placed on-hook. The volume level range for digital telephone handsets is 0~8, with 0 as
the lowest volume. Anytime a handset is off-hook, the station user can adjust the volume level
anywhere between 0~8. The level setting established in this program, however, can only be from
1~4.
3-68
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 28 DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments
Program 28 DSS Console/Attendant Telephone
Assignments
Processor Type:
DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns Console #1 to Attendant Telephone #1;
Console #2 to Attendant Telephone #2; etc.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1~8
DSS ATT = 1~8
Enter the DSS console number.
Enter the attendant digital or electronic telephone
number.
Digital DSS consoles (DDSS) should
be assigned to digital telephones, and
electronic consoles (HDSS) should be
assigned to electronic telephones.
Processor
DSS Consoles
HDSS Consoles
DK14
0
0
DK40i
1~3
1~3
RCTUA
1~3
1~3
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
1~4
1~4
System & Station
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
1~8
1~8
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
1~8
1~8
DDSS PDKU/HDSS PEKU PCBs
DDSS/HDSS
Attendant DKT/EKT Number (1~8)
(Lowest to Highest)
Console Number
Low Slot Number:
1
Slot Number:
2
Slot Number:
3
Slot Number:
4
Slot Number:
5
Slot Number:
6
Slot Number:
7
High Slot Number:
8
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-69

System & Station
Program 28 DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments
Program 28 Overview
DK40i: allows up to three DSS consoles (DK40i KSU supports one DSS, Expansion Unit
supports two more). A DDSS console can only be connected to circuit 8 of the DK40i base
digital ports or a PDKU, and an HDSS console can only be connected to circuits 7 and 8 of a
PEKU.
DK424 and DK424i: supports up to eight DDSS consoles, or eight HDSS consoles, or any
combination of the two types of consoles up to eight may be installed with an RCTUC/D or
RCTUE/F common control unit. The RCTUA and DK40i can support three DSS consoles, the
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, B1CU can support four, and the RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, B2CAU/BU,
B3CAU/BU, and B5CAU/BU support eight.
The telephone connected to circuit 1 of the PCB or the DK40i Base KSU supporting a console
is designated as an attendant telephone. Consoles and telephones are numbered 1~8 as they are
installed from the lowest to highest slot number. For example, in DK424, if a PDKU in Slot 11
had a DDSS console connected to it, the DDSS console would be Console #1 and the digital
telephone connected to circuit 1 would be Attendant Telephone #1.
As many as four DSS consoles can be assigned to one attendant telephone. Because more than
one DSS console can be assigned to an attendant telephone, the detailed arrangement must be
programmed. Initialized data assigns one DSS console to one attendant telephone, both
connected to the same PDKU or PEKU PCB.
Notes
Refer to Program 03--Flexible PCB Slot Assignments, for the PCB slots of PEKUs and
PDKUs configured to support consoles.
The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest-
number PCB slot to be console number 1.
The system automatically assigns the telephone connected to the first station port on a console
PDKU or PEKU to be attendant number 1.
If more than one console is associated with one attendant telephone, then specify the same
number attendant telephone for all consoles associated with it.
3-70
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 29-1~8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments
Program 29-1~8 DSS Console and Number Button
Assignments
Processor Type:
DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See "Program 29 - Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments" on Page
3-73.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = DDSS/HDSS console number 1~8
CODE =
Assign Speed Dial, trunk access, or DSS access to
DDSS/HDSS LED Button Group 1~3
this button chosen. See code table below.
Each console has three groups of 20 LED
buttons.
The 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU and $OO &DOO 3DJH buttons
may be changed to '66, /LQH (CO) or 6' buttons,
DKT LEDs 01~20
but they may not be reassigned to other button
Press the DKT LED that is in the same position
locations.
as the console button being assigned. The LED
lights and the LCD displays the console button's
Initialized key assignments are shown following the
number.
Program 29 System Record Sheets.
Code Table and Legend
Personal
System Speed
System & Station
DSS Button
Button Type
Code
Processor
Speed Dial Bin
Dial Bin
CO Line Range
Range
Numbers
Numbers
All Call
489
DK40i
10~49
60~99
001~012
#000~#027
Night Transfer 1
439
RCTUA
10~49
60~99
001~016
#000~#031
Night Transfer 2
440
B1CU
10~49
600~699
001~032
#000~#055
Night Transfer 3
441
RCTUBA/BB
10~49
600~699
001~048
#000~#079
Night Transfer 4
442
B2CAU/BU
10~130
600~711
001~120
#000~#111
B3CAU/BU
10~130
600~791
001~120
#000~#191
RCTUC/D
10~49
600~699
001~144
#000~#239
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
100~139
200~999
001~200
#000~#335
Console Number _______
Group Number 1
Group Number 2
Group Number 3
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-71

System & Station
Program 29-1~8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments
Program 29-1~8 Overview
Each button on the DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned as either a Direct Station Selection
('66), Line (&2), or 6' button. The standard equipped 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU (17), and $OO &DOO 3DJH
($&) buttons may be changed to one of these three types, but not vice versa.
Station Speed Dial buttons assigned to a DSS console share the associated attendant digital or
electronic telephone's Speed Dial memory. The personal Speed Dial numbers of the DSS console
circuit port(s) are not available. Initialized data assigns the 60 buttons to be Direct Station
Selection ('66), $OO &DOO 3DJH ($&), and 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU (17). Each of the consoles can be
independently programmed.
Important!
Only program the following buttons: 6', /LQH (&2), '66, $OO &DOO 3DJH ($&), and
1LJKW 7UDQVIHU (17); programming other feature buttons on a console may cause
system operation problems.
It is not possible to assign [PDNs]/[SDNs]/[PhDNs] to DSS consoles or ADMs
Note
When assigning CO line access buttons (001~200), the associated telephone must be
assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40 on Page 4-4.
3-72
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 29-1~8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments
Program 29 - Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments
Group 1
Group 2
RCTUB, RCTUC/D,
RCTUB, RCTUC/D,
DSS
DSS
RCTUE/F, B1CU,
RCTUE/F, B1CU,
Button
DK40i
RCTUA
Button
DK40i
RCTUA
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU,
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU,
No.
No
B5CAU/BU
B5CAU/BU
01
#000
#000
#000
01
#020
#020
#020
02
#001
#001
#001
02
#021
#021
#021
03
#002
#002
#002
03
#022
#022
#022
04
#003
#003
#003
04
#023
#023
#023
05
#004
#004
#004
05
#024
#024
#024
06
#005
#005
#005
06
#025
#025
#025
07
#006
#006
#006
07
#026
#026
#026
08
#007
#007
#007
08
#027
#027
#027
09
#008
#008
#008
09
10
#028
#028
10
#009
#009
#009
10
11
#029
#029
11
#010
#010
#010
11
12
#030
#030
12
#011
#011
#011
12
13
#031
#031
13
#012
#012
#012
13
14
10
#032
14
#013
#013
#013
14
15
11
#033
15
#014
#014
#014
15
16
12
#034
16
#015
#015
#015
16
17
13
#035
17
#016
#016
#016
17
18
14
#036
18
#017
#017
#017
18
19
15
#037
System & Station
19
#018
#018
#018
19
20
16
#038
20
#019
#019
#019
20
21
17
#039
Group 3
RCTUB, RCTUC/D,
DSS
RCTUE/F, B1CU,
Button
DK40i
RCTUA
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU,
No
B5CAU/BU
01
22
18
#040
02
23
19
#041
03
24
20
#042
04
25
21
#043
05
26
22
#044
06
27
23
#045
07
28
24
#046
08
29
25
#047
09
30
26
#048
10
31
27
#049
11
32
28
#050
12
33
29
#051
13
34
30
#052
14
35
31
#053
15
36
32
#054
16
37
33
#055
17
38
34
#056
18
39
35
#057
AC
AC
19
AC (489)
(489)
(489)
NT 1
NT 1
20
NT 1 (439)
(439)
(439)
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-73

System & Station
Program *29 Add-on Modules Button Assignments
Program *29 Add-on Modules Button Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See "Button Assignments" on Page 3-75.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter the station logical port of the telephone which
CODE=
will have buttons assigned to its attached Add-on.
See the Code Table below.
Enter the Add-on Module which will have buttons
LED 01~20
assigned to it (0, 1, or 2). Enter 0 when removing
Press the LED that is in the same position as
ADMs.
the Add-on Module button being assigned.
Personal Speed
System Speed
DSS Button
Processor
CO Line Range
Dial Bin Numbers
Dial Bin Numbers
Range
DK40i
10~49
60~99
001~012
#000~#027
RCTUA
10~49
60~99
001~016
#000~#031
B1CU
10~49
600~699
001~032
#000~#055
RCTUBA/BB
10~49
600~699
001~048
#000~#079
B2CAU/BU
10~130
600~711
001~120
#000~#111
B3CAU/BU
10~130
600~791
001~120
#000~#191
RCTUC/D
10~49
600~699
001~144
#000~#239
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
100~139
200~999
001~200
#000~#335
Port _____
Port _____
Add-on Module 1
Add-on Module 2
Add-on Module 1
Add-on Module 2
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
Number of
Number of
Processor
ADMs
System Speed
Personal Speed
Dial Numbers
Dial Numbers
DK14
8
40
40
DK40i
12
40
40
RCTUA
12
40
40
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
40
100
40
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
120
100
40
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
200
800
40
Program *29 Overview
This program allows ADM buttons to be customized. Each ADM button can be programmed as
either a Direct Station Selection, CO line, System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial buttons. Only
2000-series Digital Telephones can connect with ADMs, and up to two ADMs can be connected to
a telephone.
3-74
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *29 Add-on Modules Button Assignments
Important!
Run this program for each station that has an ADM or the ADM will not function.
Program at least one ADM key for each ADM.
It is impossible to assign [PDNs], [SDNs] or [PhDNs] to DSS consoles or ADMs.
Button Assignments
RCTUB
RCTUB
B1CU
B1CU
Add-on
RCTUC/D
Add-on
RCTUC/D
Module 1
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUE/F
Module 2
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUE/F
Button No.
B2CAU/BU
Button No.
B2CAU/BU
B3CAU/BU
B3CAU/BU
B5CAU/BU
B5CAU/BU
01
#000
#000
#000
#000
01
20
#020
#020
#020
02
#001
#001
#001
#001
02
21
#021
#021
#021
03
#002
#002
#002
#002
03
22
#022
#022
#022
04
#003
#003
#003
#003
04
23
#023
#023
#023
05
#004
#004
#004
#004
05
24
#024
#024
#024
06
#005
#005
#005
#005
06
25
#025
#025
#025
07
#006
#006
#006
#006
07
26
#026
#026
#026
08
#007
#007
#007
#007
08
27
#027
#027
#027
09
#008
#008
#008
#008
09
28
10
#028
#028
10
#009
#009
#009
#009
10
29
11
#029
#029
System & Station
11
10
#010
#010
#010
11
30
12
#030
#030
12
11
#011
#011
#011
12
31
13
#031
#031
13
12
#012
#012
#012
13
32
14
10
#032
14
13
#013
#013
#013
14
33
15
11
#033
15
14
#014
#014
#014
15
34
16
12
#034
16
15
#015
#015
#015
16
35
17
13
#035
17
16
#016
#016
#016
17
36
18
14
#036
18
17
#017
#017
#017
18
38
19
15
#037
19
18
#018
#018
#018
19
39
20
16
#038
20
19
#019
#019
#019
20
40
21
17
#039
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-75

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: LEDs 01, 05 and 07 for all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
Light LEDs for the port specified in the last step. All
LEDs marked with an "X" in the table below should
Enter the port numbers to which class of service
be lit.
must be assigned. To add a port range, enter
XXXXXX (low port high port).
Processor Type
Port Range
DISA Port
Processor Type Port Range
DISA Port
DK14
000~009
010
B1CU
000~055
089
DK40i
000~027
035
B2CAU/BU
000~111
249
RCTUA
000~031
039
B3CAU/BU
000~191
249
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
089
B5CAU/BU
000~335
344
RCTUC/D
000~239
249
RCTUE/F
000~335
344
Program 16
Port Number
Line Group
For R4.3 and higher: If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Restriction and
Number
LCR on tandem calls, assign a class of service in Programs 30, 40, 41, 43, 48 and 56.
Program ports 900~916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01~16, respectively.
900~916
00~16

Port
Feature
LED
SLT/ISDN Terminal "#" Dial
20
Privacy Override
19
Executive Override
18
DND Override
17
Change TR Traveling Class Code
16
Change Verified Account Code
15
Verified Account Codes
14
13
SLT-Hook Flash Anti-Bounce Guard
12
Dial Pulse - DTMF Off
11
Change DISA Security Code
10
Change TR Override Code
09
Forced Account Code
08
OCA Automatic (originating OCA)
07
ABR Access
06
Speed Dial Allowed
05
#5#30 Pickup AC Page Only (Release 3.2
04
Microphone Button on at Start of Call
03
MIC Button Locked
02
Speakerphone
01
3-76
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Program 30 Overview
Program 30 enables or disables features for individual telephones at the station level. The
following text describes Program 30 LEDs.
LED 20: SLT/ISDN Terminal "#" Dial
This feature applies to single-line telephones and ISDN station terminals to indicate when a
number has been dialed and to begin dialing a sub-address. If a is dialed as the first digit, it
indicates that a feature access code is being entered.
For ISDN, if separate dialing and sub-address digits will be used, turn LED 20 On. If it is Off,
can be used as a dialing separator.
LED 19: Privacy Override
With Privacy Override enabled (LED 19 On), a station can override calls and listen to a CO line
conversation by pressing a common CO /LQH button (not a [DN] button). [DN] buttons are always
private. A maximum of two stations can override an existing "station-line" conversation. You can
set a warning tone for Privacy Override (see Program 10-2).
Privacy Override of Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Two-CO line calls is not allowed.
Privacy Override is not available on any call (CO line or internal) that appears on a [PDN], [SDN],
or [PhDN] button.
Block Privacy Override by a station via a 3ULYDF\ button (Program 39) or with the Executive/
Privacy Override blocking option (Program 31, LED 18). To configure the Strata DK system to
operate as nonprivate, allow Privacy Override from all stations. Disabling Privacy Override for
System & Station
attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop Monitoring.
LED 18: Executive Override
With Executive Override enabled (LED 18 On) a station can break into and overhear an existing
station conversation by pressing after the busy station number or by pressing the "EXEOVR"
LCD soft key. You can set a warning tone for this feature (see Program 10-2).
Privacy Override can be perform from stations with Executive/Privacy Override blocking enabled
in Program 31, LED 18. The 3ULYDF\ button does not block Executive Override. Disabling
Executive Override for attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop
Monitoring.
LED 17: Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
With DND Override enabled, (LED 17 On), you can override a station that has DND On. A called
station with DND activated will return very fast busy tone (four tones per second). If the caller
presses after dialing the DND station directory number, a DND Override tone is heard on the
called station's speaker.
If a DND station has more than one [PDN] and it appears on other telephones, when called, the
[PDN] rings at the other telephones and flashes on the DND station. In this case, DND override is
not available unless all [PDNs] of the DND station are busy.
LED 16: Change Toll Restriction Traveling Class Code
When LED 16 is On for a port, the station occupying it can change the four-digit Toll Restriction
Traveling Class of Service Codes established in Program 44-1~8. Stations selected for this feature
must follow the dialing sequences below to change the codes:
Class 1
#691
Class 5
#695
Class 2
#692
Class 6
#696
Class 3
#693
Class 7
#697
Class 4
#694
Class 8
#698
[PDN] + class code ( ~ ) + four-digit code + 5HGLDO
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-77

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
LED 15: Change Verified Account Code
With LED 15 On, a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in Program 69.
Selected stations must dial the following sequence to change the codes:
[PDN] + + Verified Account Code + Redial:
System
Verified Account Code
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
000~499
RCTUA, BA/BB, C/D, B1CU/BU, B2CAU/BU,
000~299
B3CAU/BU, B3BAU/BU, DK40i, DK14
Press button if your electronic telephone does not have a 5HGLDO button.Total Account Code digit
length is set in Program 10-4 (up to 15 digits). All digits do not have to be verified.
LED 14: Verified Account Code
With LED 14 On, the system verifies all Forced or Voluntary Account Codes (set in Program 69)
dialed by the station user. If the station user does not dial a specific Verified Account Codes, the
call does not execute (Forced), or the Account Code is not validated for the SMDR call report
(Voluntary).
To force a verified account code entry on Two-CO line DISA calls through the system, turn LED
08 and 14 On for Port 10-DK14, Port 035-DK40i, Port 039-RCTUA, Port 089-RCTUB,
RCTUBA/BB or Port 249-RCTUC/D or Port 344-RCTUE/F. Also, you must enable Forced
Account Code for outgoing CO line in Program 15-7.
LED 12: Single Line Telephone (SLT) Hookflash Anti-bounce Guard
SLT Hookflash Anti-Bounce Guard (LED 12 On) prevents false recalls due to hook flash bounce
during SLT hang-up on outside calls. The system automatically disconnects the CO line if the SLT
hangs-up after a Hook Flash.
Use for QSTU2, PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, PESU, and KSTU2 standard telephone ports that
have standard telephones (with/without message lamps) connected to them to prevent false ring
signals. With this option On, a CO line connected to a standard telephone is disconnected if the
standard telephone user hookflashes and then hangs up. If this option is Off, the CO line recalls the
standard telephone.
LED 11: Dial Pulse - Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Off
Use Dial Pulse - DTMF Off (LED 11 On) if any device, DID or Tie line station port does not
require the RRCS, BRCS, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or K4RCU for DTMF decoding. When the device
goes off-hook or the DID or Tie line is seized for an incoming call, the DTMF receiver is not
accessed - reducing unnecessary traffic to it.
If a Tie or DID line is Dial Pulse (Program 15-1, LED On), enable Dial Pulse - DTMF Off (LED
11 On) for that Tie or DID station port number. If the DID or Tie line is DTMF tone dial (Program
15-1, LED Off) disable Dial Pulse - DTMF Off (LED 11 Off) and install an RRCS, the RCTU,
K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3 in the DK40i, or BRCS on B1CU, B2CAU/BU,
B3CAU/BU and B5CAU/BU.
LED 10: Change DISA Security Code
When enabled (LED 10 On), allows a selected station to change the DISA security code by dialing
[PDN] + , + Security Code + 5HGLDO.
3-78
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
LED 09: Change Toll Restriction (TR) Override Code
When enabled (LED 09 On), two TR Override codes are available. When one of these codes is
dialed from any station, all Toll Restriction is bypassed. Change TR Override codes by pressing
[PDN] + for Code 1, or [PDN] + for Code 2. Press 5HGLDO to store.
LED 08: Forced Account Code
When enabled, (LED 08 On), a station or DISA CO line user using a line with a Forced Account
requirement (Program 15-7) must enter an Account Code before the outgoing CO/Tie/DID line
call can be completed. If Forced Account Codes should be verified, enable Verified Account Code
(LED 14 On). Program 60-4 defines the Forced Account Code digit length.
To force a verified account code entry on Two-CO line DISA calls through the system, (Turn
LEDs 08 and 14 On per the following table: Port 10-DK14, Port 035-DK40i, Port 039-RCTUA,
Port 089-RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, 249-RCTU C/D, and Port 344 for RCTU E/F). Also, enable
Forced Account Code for outgoing CO line in Program 15-7.
Processor
Port
Processor
Port
DK14
10
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
089
DK40i
035
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
249
RCTUA
039
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
344
LED 07: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Automatic
When LED 07 is On, a calling station has this feature enabled. If the system is set for Ring First
System & Station
Signaling (Program 10-1, LED 10 On), the user must dial after hearing busy tone or after
hearing ringback tone in order to OCA the called station. OCA Automatic only works on systems
with Voice First Signaling (Program 10-1 or 10-2, LED 01, Off) in which case the user does not
have to dial or . Initialized default: On - all ports. The called station must also be enabled to
receive OCA (see Program 31, LED 03).
LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Access
ABR can be enabled (LED 06 On) or disabled (LED 06 Off) for each station. The system selects
the last line in the originating line group each time ABR is initiated (see also Program 10-1). If you
do not enable ABR access here, the ABR soft key does not appear on LCD telephones. ABR
operates when calling on ground and loop start lines, but is not functional for DID or Tie line calls.
ABR overrides Program 41. Program 41 is normally used with LCR.
For the DK40i, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or K4RCU must be installed; for the DK14, QRCU must be
installed to detect busy tone so that ABR will function.
LED 05: Speed Dial
LED 04 enables (On) or disables (Off) Station and System Speed Dial. Initialized default: On - all
ports.
LED 04: Call Pickup Code Option
Determines the operation of pickup code in Release 3.2 (and above) software. If LED 04 is
On, only picks up All Call Page and External Page (per Program 10-2, LED 15). If LED 04
is Off, picks up an internal call ringing on a telephone as a priority or it picks up All Call
Page or External Page if no internal calls are ringing. Prior to Release 3.2, picked up
ringing calls as priority over All Call Page pickup calls.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-79

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
LED 03: Microphone Button On at Start of Call
When enabled (LED 03 On), the microphone and Mic button LED is turned On at the start of an
on-hook speakerphone call. For this feature to work, you must enable the MIC button lock
operation (LED 02 On).
When receiving internal DN calls, the flexible Microphone Cutoff (0LFURSKQ &XWRII) button
(Program 39) can be used to prevent room monitoring and Handsfree Answerback.
LED 02: Mic Button - Locked/Momentary
The 0LF button turns electronic or digital telephone microphones On/Off:
With "Locked" (LED 02 On), the 0LF button will be On or Off (depending on LED 03) when you
begin the call and you can alternately push it On or Off. This does not apply to Handset OCA -
which is 0LF push-to-talk only.
With "Momentary" (LED 02 Off), the 0LF is always On at the start of a speakerphone call/ You
must continuously press 0LF to disable the microphone when during a speakerphone call.
LED 01: Speakerphone
Enables (LED 01 On) or disables (LED 01 Off) speakerphone operation on any electronic or
digital telephone. If disabled, a speakerphone:
Can be used as a handsfree electronic or digital telephone.
Enables talk back with the receiver on-hook when receiving an internal call.
Will not allow you to talk on a call that you place or a call that you answer by pressing a
ringing button with the handset on-hook.
Program 30 - Example
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware
No. N-N1
Requirements on Page 1-14.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the
programming telephone.
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 30
Access Program 30.
Data Store
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
30 Select =
Prepare the system for a station port selection.
5.
Enter the port number where the station being defined is connected.
30 Select =
Use three digits, followed by a button. A range of ports may be
entered at once by using the button. (See Note on system record
sheet for port numbers.)
3-80
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 30 Station Class of Service
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)
LCD Response
6.
LED buttons 01~20
LED buttons 01~20 activate features for each station port or port
range. Make the following selections by turning the appropriate button
LED On or Off for each item (01~20) for each port, as marked on the
system record sheet:
LED 01: Speakerphone Enabled
LED 02: Microphone Key Lock Enabled
LED 03: Microphone On at Start of Call
LED 04: Not Used
LED 05: Speed Dial Allowed
LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial Access Enabled
LED 07: Automatic Off-hook Call Announce
LED 08: Forced Account Code Enabled
LED 09: Toll Restriction Override Code Revision Authority
LED 10: DISA Security Code Change Allowed
LED 11: Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) for Standard Telephone
LED 14: Account Codes Verified
LED 15: Verified Account Code Revision Authority
LED 16: Traveling Class of Service Code Revision Authority
LED 17: Do Not Disturb Override Allowed
System & Station
LED 18: Executive Override Allowed
LED 19: Privacy Override Allowed
LED 20: Not Used
If programming a port range, the LED indications are as follows:
LED-On, all ports in range are enabled for that item.
LED-Off, all ports in range are disabled for that item.
LED-FLASHING, some ports in range are enabled and some
ports are disabled.
7.
+ROG
30 Select
Secure data in system programming.
Data Programmed
8.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
30 Select =
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5), or exit
Program 30 (continue with Step 9).
9.
+ROG
30 Select = ##
Secure Program 30 data in system memory.
Data Programmed
10. 6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 30. Enter another program number or exit programming
mode (go to Step 11). Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program
33.
11.
+ROG
No. N-N
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:58
1. N-N = Programming telephone [PDN]
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-81

System & Station
Program *30 Telephone Group Page Assignments
Program *30 Telephone Group Page Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: All LEDs Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter the station logical port which will be assigned
Press LED Buttons 01~08 to light LEDs for the port
to page a group or groups. To add a port range,
specified in the last step. In the table below, "X" all
enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
LED Buttons which should be lit.
Processor Type Port Range
Number of Page Groups
Processor Type Port Range
Number of Page Groups
DK14
000~009
4
B1CU
000~055
4
DK40i
000~027
4
B2CAU/BU
000~111
8
RCTUA
000~031
4
B3CAU/BU
000~191
8
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
4
B5CAU/BU
000~335
4
RCTUC/D
000~239
8
RCTUE/F
000~335
8
Port
Feature
LED
Page Group H
08
Page Group G
07
Page Group F
06
Page Group E
05
Page Group D
04
Page Group C
03
Page Group B
02
Page Group A
01
Shaded groups apply to RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F only.
Program *30 Overview
Digital and electronic telephones can be assigned to "internal telephone speaker" page groups with
this program. Each group can have as many as 120 stations. Telephones can be a member of more
than one group. Station users can access each group separately by dialing access codes. (See
Program 05 for access codes.) The above table shows four or eight page groups. An additional
group is the All Call Page Group set in Program 31, LED 10.
Notes
A maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to a particular page group.
Only 120 telephones can be paged simultaneously. Example: If Page Group "A" has 60
telephones, Page Group "B" has 50 telephones, and Page Group "C" has 70 telephones, then
Group A + B (60 + 50 = 110) can be paged simultaneously, but Group A + C (60 + 70 = 130)
cannot be paged simultaneously.
3-82
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
Program 31 Station Class of Service
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: LED 10 On for Ports 000~119; LED 11~13 On for all ports.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)
Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last
step. All LED Buttons marked with an "X" in the
Enter the port numbers to which class of service
table below should be lit.
must be assigned.

Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Feature
LED
Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B + Station No.)
20
System & Station
Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B No Station)
19
Executive & Privacy Override Blocking
18
End/End Signal Rcv (VM)
17
Receive VM ID Code
16
Toshiba Stratagy/VP Integration (A/D)
15
Handset OCA
14
Handset OCA Warning Tone
13
Pooled Line Key - No Flash if No Ring
12
Busy Override Tone - Continuous
11
All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs
10
VM (No Conference)
09
VM Group 4 (does not apply to DK14)
08
VM Group 3 (does not apply to DK14)
07
VM Group 2
06
VM Group 1
05
VM to VM Call Blocking Called/Calling
04
OCA Enabled (To Receive)
03
Handsfree No Warning Tone
02
Handsfree Disabled
01
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-83

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
Program 31 Overview
Program 31 sets most voice mail or External Auto Attendant port assignments. Each standard
telephone port (QSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2) connected to a
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP voice mail system should have LEDs 04, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
and 20, and one of the following: 05, 06, 07, or 08 turned On. These LED's should be On for VM
ports only, not for telephone ports.
LED 09 should be Off for VM Auto Attendant "blind" transfer and VM tandem CO line
connection with automatic release. LED 09 should be On for VM Auto Attendant supervised
transfer operation.
Example Programming Assignment to Set Up Voice Mail in a Distributed Hunt Group
Program *32
008
VMG1 Message Center
Program 13
010
VMG2 Message Center
008 Button 5 On
VMG1 RSTU VM Ports
009 Button 5 On
Program 31
010 Button 6 On
VMG2 RSTU VM Ports
011 Button 6 On
850 01
008
VMG1 DH Group Members
850 02
009
Program *40
851 01
010
VMG1 DH Group Members
851 02
011
RS232C (SMDI)
N/A on DK14
Phones using
#008
DHG1/VMG1
Voice Mail
#200
voice mail
Machine 1
#009
#201
machine 1
008
Phones using
DHG2/VMG2
#010
#202
voice mail
#011
#203
Voice Mail
machine 2
010
Machine 2
Standard Telephone
1565
Voice Mail Ports
All ports assigned to a Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a unique Distributed Hunt
Group using Program 40. Each Program 31 Voice Mail Group must be associated with a unique
Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group that hunts only to its own Voice Mail Group ports. (See
above example of how to connect/program two voice mail/auto attendant machines and associate
them with two different DH groups.)
If LED 15 or 19 is On, turn LED 17 On. If LED 20 is On, turn LEDs 17 and 19 On.
For SMDI or DTMF integration, turn On LEDs 04, 16, 17 and 18, and one of the following:
05, 06, 07, or 08 for all standard telephone ports connected to a VM unit.
Turn LED 19 and 20 Off if the VM unit does not respond properly to transfer recall (B-Tone)
signals when using any type of Voice Mail Interface.
LED 09 see above comments in Program Overview.
If CO lines direct ring VM ports via Program 81~89, the data in Programs 81, 84, and 87
must be blank.
Important!
Do not assign Program 31 VM/AA options to built-in Auto Attendant digital
announcer ports.
3-84
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
LED 20: Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B + Station Number)
Use with Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP systems connected to a standard telephone port
(PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2). Toshiba voice mail systems
receiving DTMF B tone followed by the station number may not know where the call is coming
from - such as hold recall or "blind" ring transfer recall.
When enabled (LED 20 On), allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond more intelligently with
appropriate voice prompts. Use this feature for standard telephone ports connected to voice mail
devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones. The station number is not returned, it
blind transfers to a DND station.
Note
You must enable Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP (B No Station) with LED 19 to allow
this function.
LED 19: Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP (B No Station)
DTMF "B" tone is sent to Toshiba voice mail systems to signify a recall where Toshiba voice mail
systems already knows the recalling station number. Again, this allows Toshiba voice mail systems
to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts. Use this feature for standard
telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2) connected to voice
mail devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones.
LED 18: Executive and Privacy Override Blocking (Modem)
When enabled (LED 18 On), denies a station user the capability to break into a station connection
with Executive or Privacy Override. Use this feature for standard telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU,
System & Station
RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2) connected to a modem, voice mail/auto attendant or
ACD digital announcement device in order to ensure data and voice security. Also, use this feature
to deny override of any station. This feature does not block Attendant Supervised Loop
Monitoring.
You can use the Privacy Release 3ULYDF\ 5HOHDVH button to disable Privacy on a call-by-call
basis; this button does not disable Executive Override Blocking.
Enable this feature if a modem is assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21 to provide
data security for modem standard telephone ports.
Disable this feature (LED 18 Off) for the modem standard telephone ports assigned in Program 21
if using the system modem pool for data calls that must be switched between voice and data.
LED 17: End-to-end Signal RCV (VM)
When enabled (LED 17 On), provides End-to-end Signaling of Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) tones through the system. Required on all voice mail ports (RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/
RSTS, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, QSTU2 and KSTU2) for proper signaling communication.
LED 16: Receive Voice Mail (VM) ID Code
When a station is call-forwarded to a VM system, certain identification (ID) DTMF tones are
automatically sent to direct the call to a specific mailbox (VM ID Code #656 or DNIS VM ID
Code). The automatic ID is also sent to the VM device when electronic, digital, or standard
telephone users retrieve messages via the Message Waiting buttons (VM ID Code #657). The VM
port must be programmed for this feature to allow the reception of VM ID DTMF digits.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-85

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
LED 15: Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK and/or VP Integration (A Tone/D Tone)
When enabled (LED 15 On), sends an answer tone (DTMF A tone) to the Toshiba voice mail
system when a station answers, and a disconnect tone (DTMF D tone) when a station disconnects.
This allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond quickly rather than waiting during long time-
outs. If the Central Office (CO) provides an Automatic Release (AR) signal (sometimes referred to
as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision), D tone is also sent to disconnect VM ports when
outside callers hang up (see Program 15-0 and 15-3).
LED 14: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Handset or Speaker
If a station is enabled to receive OCA (Program 31, LED 03 On), LED 14 defines which type of
OCA the telephone should receive: Headset/Handset (LED 14 On) or Speaker (LED 14 Off).
Digital Telephones: Speaker OCA requires a DVSU and a special Program 03 code. Only digital
telephones can receive Handset OCA. Handset OCA does not require DVSU or any other special
hardware.
Electronic Telephones: Speaker OCA requires a HVSU and three-pair wiring. Headset OCA does
not require these items; Electronic or standard telephones cannot receive Handset OCA.
LED 13: OCA Handset Warning Tone
This option enables (LED 13 On) or disables (LED 14 Off) a warning-tone (one-second tone burst)
for digital telephones that receive Headset OCA. Does not apply to Speaker OCA.
LED 12: Pooled Line Button Operation, No Flash if No Ring
When enabled (LED 12 On) on telephones assigned to ring in Programs 81~89, incoming line
calls in pooled line groups only flash on 3RROHG /LQH buttons. When disabled (LED 12 Off), the
Pooled Line LED flashes when an incoming line call is received even if the telephone does not
ring.
LED 11: Busy Override (BOV) Tone
Digital or Electronic Telephones: If a [DN] is busy and receives a call on an idle [DN] or CO
button from another station or an outside line then BOV tone is sent. BOV tone can be continuous
muted one-second rings (LED 11 On) or two muted one-second rings three seconds apart (LED 11
Off).
If all the [DN] button appearances of the called [DNs] are busy, the call will camp-on and the
telephone receives two muted rings (camp-on tone) three seconds apart (only if LED 01 is On for
the telephone in Program 34).
This BOV feature does not apply to CO lines that are ring transferred to a busy telephone - with or
without an idle [DN] or CO /LQH button. In this case, the call is a camped-on call to the busy
telephone.
BOV and Camp-on muted ring tone frequency for digital and electronic telephones:
1209Hz/modulated by 10Hz on CO line calls; 1209Hz/unmodulated on station-to-station calls.
Standard Telephones: This feature does not apply to Camp-on tone sent to standard telephones.
Standard telephones only receive two Camp-on tone bursts - three seconds apart, regardless of this
BOV Tone feature's setting. Also, you must run Program 34 to enable a standard telephone to
receive Camp-on tone. Camp-on tone is sent when the busy standard telephone receives a
transferred CO line call and when the busy standard telephone receives a direct call from a station
or CO line.
3-86
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
BOV and Camp-on muted ring tone frequency for standard telephone:
BOV tone is a 160ms burst of 1209Hz/ unmodulated, twice - three seconds apart.
Camp-on tone is two one-second bursts of 1209Hz/interrupted by 160ms bursts, three seconds
apart.
LED 10: All Call Page Allowed-Digital and Electronic Telephones
When enabled, (LED 10 On) any station can be allowed to receive an All Call Page and still have
the ability to initiate an All Call Page. Up to 120 stations can be can be assigned and paged at one
time. All Call Page is treated as any other page group. See Program 30 for telephone page group
assignments and Program 10-2, LED 15 for External Page with All Call Page option (see Program
34).
LED 09: No Station plus CO Line Conference Origination by VM
When enabled (LED 09 On), prohibits VM ports from setting up conference calls with a station
and the outside line party and tandem calls with two outside lines. Use this feature for VM (RSTU,
RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2, QSTU2) ports. This LED should be On when VM/
Auto Attendant does screened or supervised transfers and Off if only doing blind transfers.
If LED 09 is Off or On, station can still set up a conference call with an outside line and a VM port
so the station user and outside party can listen to a message together (R3.2 and above).
In DK release 3.2 software, VM ports are allowed to set up tandem calls with two CO lines and
then hook-flash and hang-up to exit the call, allowing the two CO lines to remain connected. For
this feature, LED 09 must be Off for VM ports.
System & Station
LED 05~08: Voice Mail (VM) Groups 1~4
The system allows the following VM station port groups to be configured for support of VM/auto
attendant devices:
One group is intended for each different device.
System
Number of VM Groups
LEDs
DK14
1~2
05~06
DK40i, DK424, DK424i
1~4
05~08
All standard telephone ports (RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2 and QSTU2)
connected to a particular VM machine should be assigned to the same VM group (SMDI or DTMF
Integration). The purpose of VM grouping is to allow efficient use of the message waiting (MW)
set and cancel operations from the VM machine. Since each digital, electronic, and standard
telephone can only have a maximum of four messages waiting, the VM device should set MW
only once, regardless of how many messages there are.
Assign all ports of each Program 31 VM Group to a unique Program 40 Distributed Hunt (DH)
Group. Telephones should Call and/or Call Forward to the DH Group [DN] to connect to VM. In
Programs 13 and 32, assign the lowest port in the Program 31 VM group as the message center.
Do not assign the VM DH Group port as the message center.
LED 04: Voice Mail (VM) to VM Call Blocking
When enabled (LED 04 On), prevents VM/auto attendant ports from call forwarding to other VM
ports during screened or supervised voice mail transfers. Use this feature for all VM/auto attendant
ports if their transferred calls are screened or supervised. Disable this feature (LED 04 Off) for all
VM/auto attendant ports if their calls are ring (blind) transferred.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-87

System & Station
Program 31 Station Class of Service
LED 03: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Enabled (Receive)
Enable this option (LED 03 On) for any digital or electronic telephone requiring OCA. Telephones
must be equipped for OCA. OCA is not available on standard telephones.
This feature does not affect the station's ability to originate OCA.
Digital telephones: Speaker OCA requires a DVSU in the telephone. Also, the PDKU supporting
OCA must have code 62 or 64 set in Program 03. Handset/headset OCA does not require extra
hardware - only that Program 31 LED 03, and 14 be On.
Electronic telephones: Speaker OCA requires a HVSU/HVSI in the telephone and a third pair of
wires from the PEKU. Electronic telephones cannot receive Handset OCA.
LED 02: Handsfree No Warning
As a default, on Voice First systems (Program 10-1, LED 1) a one-second warning tone is sent to a
handsfree digital or electronic telephone to inform its user that someone is calling and that they can
be heard. If the warning tone is not desired at the called digital or electronic telephone, this
assignment can disable it, allowing silent room monitoring of the area surrounding the telephone.
This will also prevent ringing the digital or electronic telephone as a ring-first situation. Initialized
data activates the warning tone for all ports.
LED 01: Handsfree Disabled
It is possible to disable the internal call Handsfree Answerback function on any digital or
electronic telephone. This option ensures privacy (no room monitoring) when enabled on the
called station but it prevents the called station from answering an internal call hands free. The
0LFURSKQ &XWRII button (Program 39) can be used instead of this feature to allow the user to
enable/disable Handsfree Answerback, as desired.
3-88
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *31 Group Pickup Assignments
Program *31 Group Pickup Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: All LEDs Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Station Logical Port Number
Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last
Enter the station logical port which will be assigned to a pickup
step. In the table below, mark an "X" for all LED
group or groups. To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port
Buttons which should be lit.
high port).
Processor Type
Port Range
Pickup Groups
Processor Type
Port Range
Pickup Groups
DK14
000~009
8
B1CU
000~055
20
DK40i
000~027
16
B2CAU/BU
000~111
20
RCTUA
000~031
20
B3CAU/BU
000~191
20
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
20
B5CAU/BU
000~335
20
RCTUC/D
000~239
20
RCTUE/F
000~335
20
Port
Pickup Group
LED
Pickup Group 20
20
Pickup Group 19
19
Pickup Group 18
18
System & Station
Pickup Group 17
17
Pickup Group 16
16
Pickup Group 15
15
Pickup Group 14
14
Pickup Group 13
13
Pickup Group 12
12
Pickup Group 11
11
Pickup Group 10
10
Pickup Group 9
09
Pickup Group 8
08
Pickup Group 7
07
Pickup Group 6
06
Pickup Group 5
05
Pickup Group 4
04
Pickup Group 6
03
Pickup Group 2
02
Pickup Group 1
01
Program *31 Overview
Stations can be divided into as many as 20 pickup groups (see the legend above the record sheet).
Station users can pick up calls (internal or line) that are ringing any station within their group by
dialing a single access code (or with a &DOO 3LFNXS button assigned with Code 480 in Program 39),
and pick up calls that are ringing stations in other groups by dialing selected access codes.
Stations can belong to more than one group. (See Program 05 for access codes.) This feature also
picks up ringing transfer and hold recall calls, but does not pick up held calls or selectively by
directory number.
To pickup held or ringing [PDN] and/or [PhDN] calls selectively, use the + XXX pickup
access code (where XXX is the [PDN] or [PhDN]).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-89

System & Station
Program 32 Automatic Preference
Program 32 Automatic Preference
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns Ringing Code 1 and Automatic Off-hook (Preference) Code 00 for all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
Automatic Preference Code:
00 = No selection
Enter the port number of the station having
01 = [PDN]
preference defined. To add a port range,
02 = Lowest CO, Tie, or DID line
enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
11~26 = 01~16 Line groups
DATA = Ringing Code
(See legend below for maximum line groups.)
0 = Disable Ringing Line Preference
1 = Enable Ringing Line Preference
Processor Type Port Range
Number of CO Line Groups
Processor Type Port Range
Number of CO Line Groups
DK14
000~009
01~04
B1CU
000~055
01~08
DK40i
000~027
01~08
B2CAU/BU
000~111
01~16
RCTUA
000~031
01~08
B3CAU/BU
000~191
01~16
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
01~08
B5CAU/BU
000~335
01~16
RCTUC/D
000~239
01~16
RCTUE/F
000~335
01~16
Automatic
Automatic
Port Number
Ringing Code
Port Number
Ringing Code
Preference Code
Preference Code
3-90
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 32 Automatic Preference
Program 32 Overview
This program defines which [PDN] or CO line a digital (cordless, corded, or Strata AirLink
wireless) and electronic telephone will be automatically connected to when the telephone handset
is taken off-hook or the 6SNU button is used.
Note
Strata AirLink wireless handsets do not have a 6SNU button.
The lowest [PDN], lowest CO line, or Line Group is selected only if the telephone is not ringing
when it is taken off-hook (no 6SNU pressed). If a telephone is ringing, the [PDN] Auto Preference,
or outgoing CO line is canceled. In this case, no selection is made if Ring Line Preference is
disabled; the ring line is selected if Ringing Line Preference is enabled.
Automatic Preference for digital, electronic, or Strata AirLink wireless telephones via handset off-
hook or the 6SNU button is the automatic connection to lines, or the [PDN] of a telephone under
various conditions.
With Ringing Line Preference, a digital, electronic, or Strata AirLink wireless telephone user by
going off-hook (or by pressing the 6SNU button) may be automatically connected to the lowest line
ringing in without having to press a CO /LQH button or dial an access code.
If no lines are ringing and an electronic or digital telephone goes off-hook, the station can be
automatically connected to the [PDN] or to a line. The line connected can be the lowest numbered
line available on the telephone or the highest idle line from a selected group.
Notes
System & Station
Program 32 does not apply to standard telephones. To allow system features to be accessed,
standard telephones always receive system internal dial tone when originating calls.
If ringing line preference is not selected, no auto preference selection will occur when a station
goes off hook during an incoming ring condition.
Toshiba cordless telephones can have [PDN] (Code 01) selected for Auto Preference so the
user will get system dial tone when pressing the 7$/. button from the idle state, or a line or
line group can be selected for Auto Preference if CO dial tone should be accessed when the
7$/. button is pressed.
Strata AirLink wireless handsets must have Code 01 assigned to receive system dial tone after
pressing &$// in the idle mode. A line or line group can be selected instead, if CO dial tone
should be accessed when &$// is pressed.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-91

System & Station
Program *32 RS-232 Voice Mail Message Center Port
Program *32 RS-232 Voice Mail Message Center Port
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
VM PORT = Voice Mail Message Port
(see ranges below)
Enter the Voice Mail Message Center Port
Enter the port number having a Message
number (see ranges below) that should be
Center assigned. Enter all station ports
assigned to each station.
using the same Voice Mail machine.
Enter the lowest KSTU2, QSTU2 or RSTU2 port
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low
number that is connected to the VM machine.
port high port).
If VM ports are assigned to a Distributed Hunt
(DH) Group in Program *40, enter the port
number of the first DH Group member, not the
DH Group port (900~915). See example following
Program 31 record sheet.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
MW Center Port
Port
MW Center Port
Port
MW Center Port
Port
MW Center Port
Program *32 Overview
This program assigns which Voice Mail Message Center port number will be called when a station
user presses the flashing 0VJ button. When using SMDI or DTMF voice mail integration, the
Voice Mail Port Message Center must be assigned for each station. The Message Center port must
be the lowest voice mail standard telephone port in the Program 31 Voice Mail Group. It is
normally the same port for all stations.
3-92
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 33 [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)
Program 33 [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice
Calls Only)
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = [PDN] or [PhDN] Port
HUNT TO = [PDN] or [PhDN] Port Reference
Reference Number of the "hunt-from"
Number of the "hunt-to" station.
station.
Press LED Button 01 to delete digit from the
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
"hunt-to" port.
(low port high port).
Processor Type [PDN] Port Range [PhDN] Port Range
Processor Type [PDN] Port Range [PhDN] Port Range
DK14
000~009
500~509
B1CU
000~055
500~579
DK40i
000~027
500~527
B2CAU/BU
000~111
500~739
RCTUA
000~031
500~531
B3CAU/BU
000~191
500~739
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
500~579
B5CAU/BU
000~335
500~835
RCTUC/D
000~239
500~739
RCTUE/F
000~335
500~835
System & Station
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
Hunt From
Hunt To
Program 33 Overview
Program 33 assigns Station Hunting to [PDNs] or [PhDNs]. When a called station is busy, the
Station Hunting feature will ring the alternate "hunt to" [PDNs] or [PhDNs] defined in this
program. If the "hunt-to" [DN] is busy, the system will try to ring the next "hunt-to" [DN], and so
on.
If a "hunt-to" [DN] is in the Call Forward mode, the call forward will have priority over the hunt.
A ground/loop start CO line will hunt from a [PDN] or [PhDN] only if it has been assigned to
immediate ring at the owner station of the [PDN] or [PhDN] exclusively (in Programs 81, 84, or 87
and *81, *84, or *87).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-93

System & Station
Program 33 [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)
On Ring-first systems, if a [PDN] appears on more than one button (on owner's telephone), the
DK will not hunt until all appearances of the [PDN] are in use.
On Voice-first systems, the system will hunt for an available station if any one of the [PDN]
appearances is busy.
Program 33 - Example
Action (press buttons+LED buttons)
LCD Response
1.
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone connected to
No. N-N1
physical port 005 - circuit 6.
Jan 20 Sun
06:43
Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the
programming telephone. (See "Program 38 Digital and Electronic
Telephone Keystrip Type" on Page 3-109.)
2.

Program Mode
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)
3.
6SNU 6SHDNHU +ROG
Program = 33
Access Program 33. System beeps after 6SNU 6SHDNHU is pressed
Data Store
to indicate program number may be entered.
4.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
33 Select =
Prepare the system for a station port selection.
5.
~ or ~
33 Select = (000~335)
Select the port number of the Hunt From station. A range of ports can
Hunt To =
be entered as specified on the record sheet. After the Hunt From port
is entered, press the button. Do not press when entering a range.
6.
~ or ~
33 Select = (000~335)
Enter the port number of the Hunt To point, as recorded on the system
Hunt To = (000~335)
record sheet. Press LED button 01 to delete a digit from Hunt To point
ports.
7.
+ROG
33 Select = (000~335)
Secure data in system programming.
Data Programmed
8.
6SNU 6SHDNHU
33 Select = ##
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5), or exit
Program 33 (continue with Step 9).
9.
+ROG
33 Select =
Secure Program 33 data in system memory.
Data Programmed
10. 6SNU 6SHDNHU
Program =
Exit Program 33. Enter another program number or exit programming
mode (go to Step 11). Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting
Program 33.
11.
+ROG
No. N-N
Exit programming mode.
Jan 20 Sun
06:58
1. N-N = Program telephone [PDN]
3-94
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *33 [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment
Program *33 [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Blanks (no data)

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = [PhDN] Port Reference Number
Enter the [PDN] Owner Station Logical Port
Number.
Processor Type [PDN] Port Range [PhDN] Port Range
Processor Type [PDN] Port Range [PhDN] Port Range
DK14
000~009
500~509
B1CU
000~055
500~579
DK40i
000~027
500~527
B2CAU/BU
000~111
500~739
RCTUA
000~031
500~531
B3CAU/BU
000~191
500~739
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
500~579
B5CAU/BU
000~335
500~835
RCTUC/D
000~239
500~739
RCTUE/F
000~335
500~835
[PhDN] Port
Owner Telephone
[PhDN] Port
Owner Telephone
[PhDN] Port
Owner Telephone
Reference
(Program 04)
Reference
(Program 04)
Reference
(Program 04)
Number
Port Number
Number
Port Number
Number
Port Number
System & Station
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-95

System & Station
Program *33 [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment
Program *33 Overview
This program assigns each [PhDN] to a designated "Owner" telephone. Each [PhDN] must be
assigned to a designated "Owner" telephone and that [PhDN] must be assigned (using Program 39)
to appear on the owner telephone. If a [PhDN] is not assigned to an "Owner" telephone, it cannot
receive calls (caller will receive reorder tone) but it can be used to originate calls.
If the [PhDN] owner telephone is unplugged, the [PhDN] is busy (vacant) when called, unless CF-
All Call is set, in which case, it will forward. A telephone can be assigned as "Owner" of up to
eight [PhDNs].
[PhDN] "Owner" telephones have the following attributes for the [PhDNs] that it is assigned to
own:
Set Call Forward for all [PhDNs] that the telephone owns.
Set Call Forward to a VM Mail Box and Message Retrieve ID codes (#656/#657), independent
of the telephone's Voice Mail assignments. This "CF to" VM Box can be the same as the
Owner telephone's VM Box or any other VM Box, including a dedicated VM Box for the
[PhDN].
Have up to four [PhDN] Message Waiting (MW) LEDs (Program 39, flexible button). This
[PhDN] MW button indicates that the [PhDN] has a message waiting from voice mail or
another [DN] - again independent of the telephone's fixed Msg LED.
Store ANI and/or Caller ID information for abandon calls directed to the [PhDN]. The [PhDN]
Owner telephone must be assigned "Abandon Call Memory" in Program 51 if the [PhDN]
rings on more than one telephone.
Can receive OCA calls to the [PhDN].
3-96
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 34 Hold Recall Timing
Program 34 Hold Recall Timing
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns a Hold Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
HOLD TIME = Seconds
Enter the port number having its Hold
Enter the number of seconds the system will
Recall Time defined.
wait (three digits).
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
Enter 000 for no Hold Recall. Enter 011~160 for
(low port high port).
11 to 160 seconds.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
System & Station
Program 34 Overview
Each station can have a different time (from 011 to 160 seconds) from the point of placing a call on
hold to the point of recall. Initialized data assigns a recall time of 032 seconds to all ports.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-97

System & Station
Program *34 Station Class Of Service
Program *34 Station Class Of Service
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: LED 01 On for all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
LED = Select LEDs to light for the port
specified in the last step. Mark an "X" in the
Enter the port number(s) being defined.
table below for all LEDs which should be lit.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
(low port high port).
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Feature
LED
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
Camp-on Tone to standard telephone,
01
DKT, or EKT handset/Spkr
3-98
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *34 Station Class Of Service
Program *34 Overview
Program *34 assigns Camp-on tone to standard telephones.
A standard telephone can receive (LED 01 On), or be blocked (LED 01 Off) from receiving Camp-
on tone depending on how LED 01 is programmed for its standard station port.
When LED 01 is On for a standard telephone: Camp-on tone is sent when the busy standard
telephone receives a transferred CO line call and when the busy standard receives a direct call
from a station or CO line.
An optional Camp-on busy tone burst can be sent to standard telephone handsets/headsets (LED
01 On). Turn LED 01 Off for all standard telephone ports connected to voice mail and/or auto
attendant devices.
Camp on tone to a standard telephone handset is:
Two 160 ms bursts of 1209 Hz, 3-seconds apart (internal, transferred, or Tie line calls)
Two 1-second bursts of 1209 Hz, (interrupted by 160 ms), 3-seconds apart (external CO or
DID line call)
If this option is disabled on Toshiba digital or electronic telephones (LED 01 Off), the telephone
will not receive camp-on tone on direct DID calls or transferred CO line calls if there is not an idle
[DN] or /LQH button to receive the call, but the telephone will continue to receive BOV tone on
direct internal or CO line calls, providing there is a [DN] or /LQH button available for the call to
ring.
Also, if a busy DKT or EKT receives any type of call and there is not an idle [DN] or /LQH button
System & Station
available for the call to ring, the DKT or EKT will receive camp-on tone (if LED 01 is On) or will
not receive camp-on or BOV tone (LED 01 Off).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-99

System & Station
Program 35 Station Class of Service
Program 35 Station Class of Service
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: LED 01, 02, 04, 05, 16 are On, all other LEDs Off.

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
LED = Select LEDs to light for the port
specified in the last step. Mark an "X" in the
Enter the port number(s) being defined.
table below for all LEDs which should be On.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
(low port high port).
Maximum LCD Phones With
Maximum LCD Phones With
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
Personal Messages
Personal Messages
DK14
000~009
8
B1CU
000~055
32
DK40i
000~027
16
B2CAU/BU
000~111
96
RCTUA
000~031
16
B3CAU/BU
000~191
96
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
32
B5CAU/BU
000~335
96
RCTUC/D
000~239
96
RCTUE/F
000~335
96
Port
Feature
LED
Busy Station Transfer
20
Busy Station Ringing
19
Automatic Hold
18
DKT 2000 Telephone
17
Continuous DTMF Tones Off
No CF/NA Handsfree or OCA
16
ISDN Immediate Dialing
15
Toll Restriction After Answer
14
Toll Restriction After Answer
13
Not used
12~09
ISDN Cause Code Display
08
Not used
07
Disable Hold Display
Scrolling (Release 3.2 and
06
higher)
LCD Personal Message
05
(10~19) Allowed
Message Waiting (RCV)
04
Message Waiting Lamp
03
Standard Telephones
LCD Type/32-On/12-Off
02
LCD Display
01
3-100
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 35 Station Class of Service
Program 35 Overview
LED 19: Busy Station Transfer (BST), LED 20 / Busy Station Ringing (BSR)
BST and BSR operate together to ensure that a busy digital or electronic telephone station always
receives transferred line calls along with LED and tone indications. The station or Voice Mail
(VM)/auto attendant device that transfers the call must be programmed with BST (LED 20 On)
and the station port that receives it must have BSR (LED 19 On).
When a busy station with BSR receives a transfer from a station or VM/auto attendant with BST,
there is a muted repetitive BOV tone (see Program 31, LED 11) at the busy station; if there is an
idle [DN], its LED will flash at the ringing rate until the station transferring the call hangs up.
When it does hang up, or if there is not an idle [DN], the line call then camps-on to the busy
station. The busy station is alerted of the camp-on by a camp-on tone (see Program *34), the CO
line LED flashes at the exclusive hold rate, and a message ("CAMP-ON X", X = the line number)
appears on the LCD (if equipped).
Among other applications, a VM/auto attendant device that transfers calls to a typically busy
answering position station benefits from this program. Some auto attendant devices cannot transfer
a call to a busy station if BST and BSR are not activated.
Notes
A BST station receives ringback tone, instead of busy tone, when transferring a call to a busy
BSR station.
Do not assign BST/BSR to built-in Auto Attendant announcement ports.
System & Station
BST (LED 20 On) should be assigned to all ACD agent telephones and BSR (LED 19 On)
should be assigned to all ACD supervisor telephones to allow agent assistance calls to
supervisor telephones that are busy.
LEDs 01, 02, and 04 must be On to allow the Telephone's Message Waiting LED to function
with voice mail--even if the Telephone is not an LCD type.
Dial out (with or without Toll Restriction) must be allowed to use Speed Dial Buttons after
answering incoming calls. If a CO line is put on hold, Toll Restriction is applied to stations
that are restricted when the held line is picked up by a toll restricted station. If "Dial out with
T.R." is enabled, the CO line will drop if a station dials a restricted number after answering an
incoming call, or if any digit is dialed with "dial out not allowed."
LED 18: Automatic Hold
When enabled, (LED 18 On), station users with CO /LQH buttons can place a CO line or [DN] call
on hold, then call another line or station just by pressing another CO /LQH or [DN] button and
dialing the number. If Automatic Hold is not allowed (LED 18 Off), users can put calls on hold and
place calls, but they must press the +ROG button before accessing another line or [DN].
Notes
CO line or internal calls that appear on the [DN] buttons will automatically hold when
accessing another line.
Toshiba recommends that the 5HOHDVH DQG $QV button be provided via Program 39 to
telephones programmed for Auto Hold.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-101

System & Station
Program 35 Station Class of Service
LED 17: Continuous DTMF Tones Off
2000-series digital telephones can send DTMF tones for as long as station users press their buttons
(80 msec. minimum). This feature can be disabled (LED 17 On). If it is disabled, DTMF tones sent
by these telephones will be either 80 or 160 milliseconds depending on the selection made with
Program 10-1, LED 04 and Program 10-2, LED 06.
Note
PDKU1 does not support continuous DTMF tones on 2000-series digital telephones.
LED 16: No Call Forward/No Answer on Handsfree Answerback
When enabled (LED 16 On), a Handsfree Answerback call to an idle station in the Call Forward
No-Answer or Call Forward-Busy/No Answer mode is not forwarded. If the system is
Programmed for Voice first (Program 10-1 and 10-2, LED 01 Off), Voice Announce calls do not
Call Forward No-Answer; however, calls will call forward busy. This prevents the call from being
forwarded 8-60 seconds after the called party has been talking in the Handsfree Answerback
mode.
Outside calls and busy internal calls to the station continue to forward with this feature set. If the
system is set for Tone First, calls will call forward on Busy and No Answer.
Notes
The caller can press the RING Soft Key on digital LCD telephones or press on digital or
electronic telephones to activate Call Forward on Voice Announce calls.
OCA calls do not Call Forward No Answer in any case.
LED 15: ISDN Immediate DIaling
ISDN Immediate Dialing Without Subaddress enables the system to send out the SETUP message
to an ISDN line without waiting for the user to press the Start button and without waiting for the
time span between digits to time out. If LED 15 is On, ISDN Immediate Dialing is valid. If LED
15 is Off, the feature is Off (default).
ISDN Immediate Dialing is available for PRI calls on POTS, FX, OUTWATS and BRI POTS
calls. It is unavailable for senderized and cut-through calls on Tie lines, since the Tie lines are
provided for exclusive use. Immediate Dialing is not applicable for INWATS lines, since this
service line is for incoming calls only.
Since the ISDN Immediate Dialing begins as soon as the dialed number is confirmed as valid per
the NANP table below. ISDN subaddress dialing will be unavailable since the user will not have
the opportunity to enter a subaddress.
Table 3-2
ISDN Immediate Dialing for Call Types
Call Type
Program
Number Dialed from Station
ISDN Immediate Dialing Available
National
1 + AC + OC + XXXX
Yes
OAC
*45-5
OAC + OC + XXXX
Yes
Local
50-5
OC + XXXX
Yes
No because the number of digits varies
International
01 + XXX + XX . . . XX
depending on country.
Carrier Operator
00
Yes
Operator
50-6
0
No because it competes with credit calls.
Credit
43
0 + AC + OC + XXXX
Yes
3-102
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 35 Station Class of Service
Table 3-2
ISDN Immediate Dialing for Call Types (continued)
Call Type
Program
Number Dialed from Station
ISDN Immediate Dialing Available
45-1-7
Equal Access + National
10XXX
Equal Access + OAC
Yes
45-1-8
Equal Access + Local
1010XXX
Equal Access + Credit

Equal Access
Equal Access + International
1015XXX

1015XXX
No
Equal Access + Operator
45-1-9
101XXX
Service Access
XX Ext. 69 (Return Call)
No due to an insufficient number of digits.
Code
Special DIal
50-3
N11
Yes
Immediate Dialing complies with NANP; therefore, it doesn't apply when:
the number of digits dialed are not fixed (as in an international call)
the dialed number competes with other types of calls, such as operator or credit calls
a special dialing number system is provided by the telephone company, such as class of
service.
Immediate Dialing also does not work for:
System & Station
DNIS network routing (see Program 72)
DISA external connection features
CF-EXT
Also, if a number that is Toll Restricted is dialed, the call will be blocked.
For LCR, the SETUP message is sent out without requiring the 6WDUW button if 6WDUW is registered
in "Program 55 LCR Modified Digits Table" on Page 5-19.
Speed Dial/Redial can be used to make immediate outgoing calls act like ISDN Immediate Dialing
calls--see "Program 10-4 ACD/ISDN/Tandem Parameters" on Page 6-6, LED 14.
LEDs 13 and 14: Toll Restriction After Answer
These two LEDs determine whether or not a toll restricted telephone user is allowed to use one
touch speed dial buttons after answering an incoming CO line call. LED 13 and 14 should be
turned On for Toll Restricted Telephones that must answer incoming CO line calls and use 6'
(speed dial) buttons programmed to perform functions that Hold or Park calls and access the page
system automatically.
LED 13
LED 14
Description
Off
Off
Not allowed to use Speed Dial after answering a line call.
On
Off
Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons but subject to toll restriction tables.
Off
On
Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons and not subject to toll restriction.
Initialized data sets both LEDs 13 and 14 off for all telephone users (not allowed to use Speed Dial
buttons after answering incoming CO line calls).
LED 07~12
Not used at this time.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-103

System & Station
Program 35 Station Class of Service
LED 06: Disable Hold Display Scrolling (Release 3.2)
If LED 06 is On, Hold Display scrolling is disabled. Also, a telephone LCD cannot display which
CO lines are on hold on a [PDN] if the 6FUROO button is pressed. Hold Display causes the [DN]
button LED, of the line displayed on the LCD, to flash at a fast rate. If LED 06 is Off, Hold
Display Scrolling is enabled. Prior to Release 3.2, Hold Display Scrolling was always enabled.
Hold Display Scrolling requires an LCD telephone.
LED 05: LCD Individual Message
This option defines which ports can allows LCD digital and electronic telephones to store up to 10
personal messages. It offers the option of entering alphanumeric memos for each of the LCD's
station speed dial numbers. See the record sheet legend for the maximum stations that can have
this option:
A low port must be disabled (LED 05 Off) before adding a port above the initialized ports.
LED 04: Message Waiting (RCV)
If the message waiting indication is not desired on an electronic, digital or standard telephone, this
program can be used to deny it. This does not affect that station's ability to send a message waiting
indication to another station ([PDN] or [PhDN]). Do not use this option to enable/disable MW
lamps on standard telephones; use LED 03 below for standard telephones.
LED 03: Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Enable
This option is used to identify which station ports are connected to Standard Telephones (2500 or
500 type telephones) that have Message Waiting Lamps. LED 03 should be turned On for all
Standard Telephones ports that should support Standard Telephone Message Waiting lamps; LED
03 must be turned Off for all other station ports including digital and electronic telephone ports
that support Message Waiting LEDs. This also applies to Voice Mail ports.
Important!
Standard telephones that require the Message Waiting Lamp functions must be
connected to an RSTU2 PCB. Only one standard telephone with Message Waiting
Lamp is allowed to be connected to each RSTU2 port.
LED 02: LCD Type 32/12
Digital and 6000/6500-series LCD electronic telephones have 32-character displays. Therefore,
assignments should be left in the initialized state of 32 characters. LED 02 must be On to receive
the voice mail message waiting indication.
LED 01: LCD Display
This option should be used (LED 01 On) for all stations (even non-LCD), unless it is desired to
disable the station's LCD and message waiting functions.
3-104
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 36 Fixed Call Forward
Program 36 Fixed Call Forward
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
FORWARD TO TEL = Port Number
Enter the port number of the station that
Enter the port number of the [PDN], [PhDN] or
needs a Fixed Call Forward location
DH [DN] that will be call forwarded to when the
assigned.
)L[HG &DOO )RUZDUG button is pressed.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
[PhDNs] or DH [DNs] can be entered with DK
(low port high port).
Release 3.2 and above software only.
Press LED Button 01 to enter blanks.
[PDN] Port
[PhDN] Port
DH Group
[PDN] Port
[PhDN] Port
DH Group
Processor
Processor
Range
Range
Ports
Range
Range
Ports
DK14
000~009
500~509
900~915
B1CU
000~055
500~579
900~915
DK40i
000~027
500~527
900~915
B2CAU/BU
000~111
500~739
900~915
RCTUA
000~031
500~531
900~915
B3CAU/BU
000~191
500~739
900~915
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
500~579
900~915
B5CAU/BU
000~335
500~835
900~915
RCTUC/D
000~239
500~739
900~915
RCTUE/F
000~335
500~835
900~915
System & Station
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Program 36 Overview
Fixed Call Forwarding is different from other station Call Forwarding options. It is fixed in terms
of the destination [PDN] which is assigned in this program. The station user cannot change the
Fixed Call Forward destination, unlike the other station Call Forwarding options. If Fixed Call
Forwarding is set on a station, the station does not ring and all calls forward immediately.
Note
Telephones and attendant consoles must have a )L[HG&DOO )RUZDUG button to activate
this feature (See Programs 39 and 59).
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-105

System & Station
Program *36 System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment
Program *36 System NT Button Lock Password
Changing Station Assignment
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: 000

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Tenant Number 1~4
DATA = Station port designated as Night Transfer Lock
Password Change Station for selected tenant.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Tenant Number
NT Lock Station or Console Port
1
2
3
4
Program *36 Overview
Attendant Consoles and stations assigned in this program can change the System Night Transfer
(NT) Lock password by dialing the sequence below:
>3'1@

5HGLDO RU
Tenant Number 1~4
Night Transfer Lock Password
Only one station or console can change the code. System/Tenant CO lines can be locked into the
Day, Day2, or Night ringing mode only after the NT Lock password is entered. Locking the system
into a particular ringing mode adds security to line call routing which prevents accidental or
mischievous changing of the system ringing mode.
Any telephone or an attendant console can lock the system into a ringing mode. The telephone or
console must have both a 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU and an 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU /RFN button and the person
locking the system must enter the password.
NT lock related programs include:
Program 39
Station Flexible Button Assignments 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU and 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU /RFN buttons
Program 59
Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU and 1LJKW 7UDQVIHU /RFN buttons
NT Lock Station Assignment. Program *36 is not required to assign attendant consoles to NT Lock
Program *36
functions
Program *15
CO Line Tenant Assignments
Program 74
System NT Lock Password Assignment
Program 77-3
Tenant Night Ring Over External Page Assignments
3-106
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 37 Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time
Program 37 Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
HOLD TIME = Port Number
Enter the port number that needs a Ring Transfer Recall
Enter the Ring Transfer Recall Time (three
Time assigned.
digits, in seconds)
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
Enter 011~999 for 11 to 999 seconds.
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Hold Time
Port
Hold Time
Port
Hold Time
Port
Hold Time
System & Station
Program 37 Overview
If a busy or ringing station does not answer a call sent to it via ring (blind) call transfer (lines or
[DNs]), the station originating the ring (blind) transfer is recalled after an amount of time
determined with this program. This time (011~999 seconds) is set independently for each
originating station port. Initialized data sets all stations for a 032-second recall time. Ring Transfer
must first be enabled for the system with Program 10-1, LED 07 On.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-107

System & Station
Program *37 Park Recall Timing
Program *37 Park Recall Timing
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number
PARK TIME = Seconds
Enter the port number having its Park Recall
Enter the number of seconds the system will
Time assigned.
wait (three digits). Enter 011~999 for 11 to 999
seconds.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
(low port high port).
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
Port
Seconds
Program *37 Overview
Each station can have a different duration (from 011 to 999 seconds) from the time of parking a
call to the time the parked party recalls the station. Initialized data assigns a park recall time of 032
seconds to all ports.
3-108
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type
Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone
Keystrip Type
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Assigns Code 31 to all ports
Important!
If you only want to view Program 38
data, do not press +ROG, press 6SNU.
6SNU
Pressing +ROG will change Program 39
assignments.
...or

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Port Number
BUTTOn MENU = Code
Enter the port number of the station
Enter the appropriate code:
that needs a keystrip defined.
Code 21 = 10-button telephone
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
Code 31 = 20-button (A) telephone
(low port high port).
Code 32 = 20-button (B) telephone
Code 33 = 20-button (C) telephone
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
System & Station
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Port
Button Menu
Port
Button Menu
Port
Button Menu
Port
Button Menu
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-109

System & Station
Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type
Program 38 Overview
Four telephone button arrangements are provided (see the Program 38 System Record Sheet). It is
best to start with one of these four, and then move on to Program 39, where individual buttons may
be programmed. Initialized data treats all digital telephone ports as 20-button types with 17 CO
/LQH buttons, one [PDN] button, one 'R 1RW 'LVWXUE button, and the 6SHHG 'LDO button. See the
System Record Sheet for electronic telephone arrangements.
Important!
Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to Program 39.
DKi Admin will program a Pause on buttons 11~20 on 10-key telephones.
Assignments for 2000-Series Digital Telephone Keystrips
All Call Voice Page
(for DK40i only)
...or
Speed Dial 1
Speed Dial 1
Line 9
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
Line 7
Line 172
Line 6
Line 6
Line 16
Line 5
Line 5
Line 15
Line 4
Line 4
Line 14
Line 3
Line 3
Line 13
Line 2
Line 2
Line 12
Line 1
Line 1
Line 11
[PDN]
[PDN]
Line 10
Code 21 10-Button
Code 31 (Default) 20-Button (A)
Line 9
Speed Dial1
SD14
Speed Dial1
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
SD13
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
SD 14
SD12
SD 22
Line 6
SD 13
SD11
SD 21
Line 5
SD 12
SD10
SD 20
Line 4
SD 11
Line 4
SD 19
Line 3
SD 10
Line 3
SD 18
Line 2
Line 12
Line 2
SD 17
Line 1
Line 11
Line 1
SD 16
[PDN]
Line 10
[PDN]
SD 15
DK424 and DK40i
DK14
Code 32 20-Button (B)
Code 32 20-Button (B)
SD10
Flash
Line 9
Flash
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
Speed Dial
Line 7
Speed Dial
Line 6
Redial
Line 6
Redial
Line 5
Speed Dial Pause
Line 5
Speed Dial Pause
Line 4
SD 15
Line 4
Line 12
Line 3
SD 14
Line 3
Line 11
Line 2
SD 13
Line 2
Line 10
Line 1
SD 12
Line 1
[PDN]
SD 11
[PDN]
DK424
DK40i
Code 33 20-Button (C)
Code 33 20-Button (C)
(Keystrip not provided, but can be assigned)
1. The 6SHHG 'LDO button is the same as the 6'6 or 5(3 buttons in previous Strata systems (Program 39, Code 97). Also, if
changing PEKU PCBs (electronic telephone) to PDKU PCBs (digital telephone), or vice versa, always check that the 6SHHG
3-110
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type
Assignments for 1000-Series Digital Telephone Keystrips
CO15
CO16
CO17
DND
SDS
SD12
SD13
SD14
DND
SDS
PAU
RDL
SDS
DND
FLASH
CO10
CO11
CO12
CO13
CO14
CO10
CO11
CO12
SD10
SD11
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
[PDN]
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
[PDN]
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
[PDN]
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
Code 31 (Default) 20-Button (A)
Code 32 20-Button (B)
Code 33 20-Button (C)
Assignments for Electronic Telephone Keystrips
MW/FL1
CO9
MW/FL1
Do Not Disturb
CO8
Do Not Disturb
CO7
CO7
CO172
CO6
CO6
CO16
CO5
CO5
CO15
CO4
CO4
CO14
CO3
CO3
CO13
CO2
CO2
CO12
CO1
CO1
CO11
[PDN]
[PDN]
CO10
Code 21 10-Button
Code 31 (Default) 20-Button (A)
System & Station
CO9
MW/FL1
SD10
MW/FL1
CO8
Do Not Disturb
CO8
Do Not Disturb
CO7
SD14
CO7
SDS
CO6
SD13
CO6
RDL
CO5
SD12
CO5
PAU
CO4
SD11
CO4
SD15
CO3
SD10
CO3
SD14
CO2
CO12
CO2
SD13
CO1
CO11
CO1
SD12
[PDN]
CO10
[PDN]
SD11
Code 32 20-Button (B)
Code 33 20-Button (C)
1. The 6SHHG 'LDO button is the same as the 6'6 or 5(3 buttons in previous Strata systems (Program 39, Code 97). Also, if
changing PEKU PCBs (electronic telephone) to PDKU PCBs (digital telephone), or vice versa, always check that the 6SHHG
'LDO or 0:)/ button is set appropriately in Program 39.
2. This button is initialized as 6' with RCTUA since there are only 16 CO lines.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-111

System & Station
Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type
10
9 20
9
30, 50, 70
40, 60, 80
16, 36, 56, 76
17, 37, 57, 77
18, 38, 58, 78
19, 39, 59, 79
20, 40, 60, 80
90, 110, 130,
100, 120, 140,
96, 116, 136,
97, 117, 137,
98, 118, 138,
99, 119, 139,
100, 120, 140,
150, 170, 190
160, 180, 200
156, 176, 196
157, 177, 197
158, 178, 198
159, 179, 199
160, 180, 200
11, 31, 51, 71
12, 32, 52, 72
13, 33, 53, 73
14, 34, 54, 74
15, 35, 55, 75
09
8 19
8
29, 49, 69
39, 59, 79
91, 111, 131,
92 112, 132,
93, 113, 133,
94, 114, 134,
95, 115, 135,
89, 109, 129,
99, 119, 139,
151, 171, 191
152, 172, 192
153, 173, 193
154, 174, 194
155, 175, 195
149, 169, 189
159, 179, 199
06, 26, 46, 66
07, 27, 47, 67
08, 28, 48, 68
09, 29, 49, 69
10, 30, 50, 70
08
7 18
7
86, 106, 126,
87, 107, 127,
88, 108, 128,
89, 109, 129,
90, 110, 130,
28, 48, 68
38, 58, 78
146, 166, 186
147, 167, 187
148, 168, 188
149, 169, 189
150, 170, 190
88, 108, 128,
98, 118, 138,
148, 168, 188
158, 178, 198
01, 21, 41, 61
02, 22, 42, 62
03, 23, 43, 63
04, 24, 44, 64
05, 25, 45, 65
81, 101, 121,
82, 102, 122,
83, 103, 123,
84, 104, 124,
85, 105, 125,
07
6 17
6
27, 47, 67
37, 57, 77
141, 161, 181
142, 162, 182
143, 163, 183
144, 164, 184
145, 165, 185
87, 107, 127,
97, 117, 137,
1843
147, 167, 187
157, 177, 197
06
5 16
5
26, 46, 66
36, 56, 76
1000-series digital telephone strip - shows programming button/LED
86, 106, 126,
96, 116, 136,
assignment locations. Shown as reference only - not available as an
146, 166, 186
156, 176, 196
individual strip.
05
4 15
4
25, 45, 65
35, 55, 75
85, 105, 125,
95, 115, 135,
145, 165, 185
155, 175, 195
04
3 14
3
LED Buttons and CO line numbers (01~20)
24, 44, 64
34, 54, 74
84, 104, 124,
94, 114, 134,
144, 164, 184
154, 174, 194
03
2 13
2
Last digit of EK port number for
23, 43, 63
33, 53, 73
programs with a format like
83, 103, 123,
93, 113, 133,
*71, *72, and *73
143, 163, 183
153, 173, 193
02
1 12
1
22, 42, 62
32, 52, 72
82, 102, 122,
92, 112, 132,
CO line numbers (21~200)
142, 162, 182
152, 172, 192
01
0 11
0
21, 41, 61
31, 51, 71
2000-series digital telephone strip - supplied with each Strata DK
81, 101, 121,
91, 111, 131,
Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the
141, 161, 181
151, 171, 191
system. Can also be used with 6000- and 6500-series electronic telephones.
Note
Button numbers 01~200 on electronic telephones (6000, 6500 series, etc.) are in the same
position as shown on the 2000-series digital telephone programming keystrip.
3-112
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *38 Standard Telephone Ring-Down Destination
Program *38 Standard Telephone Ring-Down
Destination
Processor Type:
Release 4.0 and higher RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Does not assign Ring Down Destination to any port

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Standard Telephone Logical Port Number
FORWARD TO TEL = Port Number
Enter the port number of the station that needs a Ring Down
Enter the port number of the [PDN], [PhDN] or
Destination assigned.
DH [DN] that should ring when the Ring-Down
Timer (Program 12-1) expires.
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX (low port high port).
[PDN] Port
[PhDN] Port
DH Group
[PDN] Port
[PhDN] Port
DH Group
Processor
Processor
Range
Range
Ports
Range
Range
Ports
DK14
N/A
N/A
900~915
B1CU
000~055
500~579
900~915
DK40i
N/A
N/A
900~915
B2CAU/BU
000~111
500~739
900~915
RCTUA
000~031
500~531
900~915
B3CAU/BU
000~191
500~739
900~915
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
500~579
900~915
B5CAU/BU
000~335
500~835
900~915
RCTUC/D
000~239
500~739
900~915
RCTUE/F
000~335
500~835
900~915
System & Station
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Port
Forward to Tel Port
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-113

System & Station
Program *38 Standard Telephone Ring-Down Destination
Program *38 Overview
Standard telephones can be assigned to ring a destination automatically by going off-hook (ring
down). They can also be programmed to ring a destination if an incomplete valid number is dialed.
This program assigns the ring down destination. The timer in Program 12-1 determines when the
destination should ring after the standard telephone goes off hook or if an incomplete valid number
is dialed.
If a standard telephone is assigned a ring down destination, ring down will always occur after the
ring down timer expires unless a valid feature access code or [DN] is dialed prior to the ring down
timer expiration (Program 12-1). Ring down applies only to standard telephone ports, not
electronic or digital telephone ports.
3-114
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See Program 38

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Port Number
Code
Enter the port number(s) to which
class of service must be assigned.
Press LED Button to be defined.
To add a port range, enter
XXXXXX (low port high port).
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
System & Station
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
10 LCD
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Port No. _______
20 DIU
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-115

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Program 39 Overview
Program 39 assigns features to the flexible buttons for individual telephones in the system. Several
types of buttons can be assigned with this program, including:
Feature
[PDNs], [SDNs] and [PhDNs] Message Waiting buttons can be assigned to [PhDNs]
Alert Signal (Buzz key)
Feature Buttons Assignments
You can assign commonly used telephone features to any flexible button (see Table 3-1). Button
assignments can be different for individual telephones. Telephone users can also assign flexible
buttons if their COS and/or if programming permits the feature on their telephone.
Strata AirLink handsets interfaced to the Strata DK using the RWIU/WWIS PCB have only six
flexible buttons (4~9) available for programming.
Important!
DKi Admin programs a Pause on buttons 11~20 on 10-key telephones.
The /LQH button on the DKT2001 is flexible button 01. Only program a [PDN] onto this
button. Do not program CO lines or secondary line appearances onto button 01 or in any
other position. Since the system assigns CO lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any CO
line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ).
Note
If the 6SHHG 'LDO 6HOHFW button is removed, the key becomes the 6SHHG 'LDO 6HOHFW
button. While on an outside call, the user must press then to activate the and
DTMF tones for the duration of the call.
To assign features to flexible buttons
1. Complete Program 38 before Program 39. Initialized data assigns the keystrip pattern
associated with Code 31 from Program 38.
2. Use "Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments" on Page 3-115 to indicate feature buttons.
Use the programming sequence after this table to perform the following steps.
3. Program the port number or enter a range of port numbers.
4. Press the button that will be associated with the feature.
5. Enter the feature code.
6. Repeat this procedure until all feature buttons have been assigned.
Table 3-3
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Account Code
Account Code or ACCNT
450
Allows a Voluntary Account Code entry.
Alarm1
Alarm Reset or ALRM
477
Resets alarm condition system-wide.
Alert Signaling (see following pages)1
Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital telephones
All Call Voice Page
All Call Page or AC
489
over speaker.
Automatic Busy Redial
Auto Busy Redial or ABR
470
Sets ABR of busy outgoing number.
Automatic Callback Busy
Auto Callback or ACB
494
Sets ACB for station recalled by busy line.
Background Music1
Tel Set Music or BGM
478
Turns BGM On or Off through station speaker.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC
487
All calls forward to selected station.
3-116
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Table 3-3
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones (continued)
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Forwards all calls to pre-defined destination. See
Call Forward A.C. Fixed
Call Frwd to: or CFF
486
Program 36.
Call Forward Busy
Call Frwd Busy or CFB
459
Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy.
Call Forward Busy/No
Call Frwd Busy/NAns or CFB/
Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy or
457
Answer
NA
does not answer.
Call Forward External
Call Frwd External or CF-EXT
460
Forward calls externally.
Forwards calls to selected station if station does not
Call Forward No Answer
Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA
458
answer.
Call Park2
Park in Orbit or PARK (R3)
464
Call Park Only.
CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be used
Call Park LCD Display1
Park Orbit DIsplay or CPD
465
interchangeably. Displays call parked via telephone
(R3)
LCD.
Call Park and Page
Call Park/Page or CP/PG (R3)
463
Parking and Paging Park Pickup.
Call Pickup (Directed)
Directed Pickup or PKUP
484
Picks up ringing or held intercom, trunk calls, and page.
Call Pickup Tenant 43
PKUP 4
435
Call Pickup Tenant 33
PKUP 3
436
Picks up tenant's ringing CO calls.
Call Pickup Tenant 23
PKUP 2
437
See Program *15 for Tenant Group assignments.
Call Pickup Tenant 13
PKUP 1
438
Picks up a call to any group to which station is assigned
Call Pickup (Group)2
Group Pickup
480
in *31.
Unanswered Caller ID and/
Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and/or Automatic Number
Lost Call Auto Dial (R3) or
or ANI Stored Number Auto
462
Identification (ANI) telephone number that was stored in
LCAD
Dial1
station Caller ID/ANI memory.
Line 1~200 or CO 001~CO
001~
CO Line Appearance
CO line access of appearing calls.
200
200
System & Station
Data1
Data Call or DATA
456
Used to place data call.
Data Release1
Data Release or DRLS
454
Releases data call.
#000~
Direct Station Selection
DSS
Assigns DSS hotline keys to port number.
#239
Directory Numbers (see following pages)
Do Not Disturb4
Do Not Disturb or DND
498
Prevents calls to station.
Unlock Door 0 or DRLK 0
471
Unlock Door 1 or DRLK 1
472
Door Lock 0 ~4 (DDCB/
Momentarily unlocks door (3 or 6 seconds).
Unlock Door 2 or DRLK 2
473
HDCB)1
Unlock Door 3 or DRLK 3
474
See Program 77-1 and 77-2.
Unlock Door 4 or DRLK 4
475
Handset Off-Hook Call
Activates 2-way voice path to Off-Hook Call Announce
Announce1
HS-OCA
468
caller. (R3)
Separates the called party's ISDN sub-address from the
ISDN Sub-address
Sub-address
467
called party number. The digit performs this function
on standard telephones.
Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the ISDN network
when this button is pressed from a digital or electronic
ISDN Start
Start
469
telephone. Program *63-2 invokes the same function
when the Dial Timer expires. Also see Tone Button in
this table.
LCD Message Select
LCD Msg Select or LCD M
481
Begins LCD message selection.
Provides message waiting LED for EKT and Flash
Message Waiting and Flash
Msg Wait, Flash or MW/FL
499
Button.
Sets microphone On/Off for incoming handsfree
Microphone Cutoff5
Microphn Cut-off or MCO
488
Directory Number [DN] calls.
Modem1
Modem or MODEM
455
Used to reserve modem in modem pool.
Night Transfer Tenant 13
Night Transfer1 or NT1
439
Night Transfer Tenant 23
Night Transfer2 or NT2
440
Sets Tenant CO line DAY/NIGHT ring mode.
Night Transfer Tenant 33
Night Transfer3 or NT3
441
Night Transfer Tenant 43
Night Transfer4 or NT4
442
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-117

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Table 3-3
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones (continued)
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 1 Night Lock1 or NT1 L1
431
Available with RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/RCTUBB3 or
RCTUC/D3 Release 3 or above only. Also available with
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 2 Night Lock2 or NT2 L2
432
B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU and B5CAU/BU.
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 3 Night Lock3 or NT3 L3
433
Used to lock system ringing mode: DAY, DAY2, NIGHT
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 4 Night Lock4 or NT4 L4
434
See Programs 74 and *36 for NT Lock Password
assignments.
Pause1
Spd Dial Pause or PAU
495
Sets pause in Speed dial See Program 12-3.
Pause (Long)1
Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU/L
493
Sets a 10-second pause in Speed Dial.
301~
Pooled Line
Pooled Line Grp or PL
Multiple CO line may appear under one button.
316
Privacy
Privacy On Line or PRIV
453
Prevents Privacy Override (not Executive Override).
Changes station Privacy mode to Non-private for CO
Privacy Release
Privacy Release or PRV RLS
479
lines.
Redial Last Number
Redial or RDL
496
Redials the last number.
(# Button)
Release to Idle
Release Call or RLS
476
Releases current call and makes station idle.
Simulates On-hook/Off-hook operation to release an
Release and Answer
Release and Ans or RLS/ANS
466
existing call and answer new incoming/ringing call.
Save Last Dialed Number
Save Last Number on SAVE
485
Saves last number dialed for future speed dial.
Speed Dial Select
( Button)6
Speed Dial or SDS
497
Begins speed dial selection.
Reserves button for station speed dial. Station Speed
Dial code ranges vary per processor:
10~

DK14, DK40i, RCTUA
49
Station Speed Dial Codes6
SD (All DK systems)
10~
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, B1CU, B2CAU/BU,
49
B3CAU/BU
100~

RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
139
Speed dial number set by station port 000. System
Speed Dial code ranges vary per processor:
60~

DK14, DK40i, RCTUA
99
System Speed Dial Codes6
SD
600~ RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, B1CU, B2CAU/BU,
699
B3CAU/BU
200~

RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
999
Tone1
Tone Dial Select or TONE
490
CO dial signals set to tone or pulse.
1. Unavailable to Strata AirLink handsets (RWIU/WWIS interface).
2. Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program *31.
3. See Program *15 for Tenant Group assignments.
4. The Strata AirLink handset (RWIU/WWIS interface) displays DND, but no warning tone is enabled for Executive or Busy
Override.
5. The Strata AirLink handset (RWIU/WWIS interface) has mute only.
6. Both wireless system handsets (RWIU and Base Station Interface Adapter) only have an internal memory Speed Dial capability.
Note
The Strata AirLink "call" button is set using Program 39, key 01. It must be set as the PDN of
the handset.
Strata AirLink handset buttons 1~6 when used with the FCN button are set using Program 39,
keys 02~07 respectively.
3-118
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Directory Number Button Assignments

6SNU +ROG 6SNU ; ; ;
< < < + ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter the logical port number of the
YYY = the Program 04 Port Number
telephone that will be assigned a [DN]
(000~336) of the [DN] that should be
...or
button.
assigned. If YYY=XXX, then the [DN]
is the [PDN]; if YYY does not = XXX,
Press the telephone button to which the
= = =
then the [DN] is an [SDN].
[DN] button should be assigned.
ZZZ = the Program *04 Port Number
(500~835) of the [PhDN] that should
be assigned.
Directory Numbers are assigned to the flexible button positions on telephones.
Primary Directory Number Buttons [PDNs] are similar to Intercom numbers.
Secondary Directory Numbers [SDNs] are [PDNs] which appear on another telephone.
Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] are generally used as numbers that may appear on a
group of telephones, such as an extension number which rings all phones in a department.
There are a number of considerations for assigning Directory Numbers. Toshiba suggests
reading the following steps and Directory Number Considerations before assigning [DNs].
To assign directory numbers to flexible buttons
1. Refer to the next page to determine how many and what type of Directory Numbers to assign
System & Station
per telephone. You can use the Flexible Button Assignments forms to indicate where [DNs]
will be placed (see "Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments" on Page 3-113).
2. Assign [PDNs] and [SDNs] by entering the Program 04 port number assignment sequence
shown below. Refer to Program 04 for Station Logical Port Numbers.
##YYY, where YYY is the port number of the DN.
If a telephone has multiple [PDN] buttons, put the lowest number [NNNN-1] on the top, the
next lowest number [NNNN-2] below that, etc. This is the order in which they will ring (from
the top down). See the Directory Number Programming Example.
3. Assign [PhDNs] by entering the Program 04 port number assignment sequence shown below.
Refer to Program 04 for Station Logical Port Numbers. Also refer to Program 33 to
determine which Station Logical Port Number is the owner of the [PhDN].
##ZZZ, where ZZZ is the Program 04 port number of the [PhDN].
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-119

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments

Button Type
Button Labels
Code
Notes
YYY = the Program 04 station logical port
Primary Directory
number of the [DN] that should appear as a
[PDN] NNNN - 1, Highest button
##YYY
Numbers [PDNs]
[PDN]. YYY should be the same port number
[PDN] NNNN - 2, next highest
##YYY
as the port number (XXX) of the telephone to
4-Maximum of same [PDN] NNNN - 3, next highest
##YYY
which the [PDN] is assigned. NNNN is the
[PDN] per telephone
[PDN] NNNN - 4, Lowest button
##YYY
actual [DN] assignment for Port YYY in
Program 04.
Secondary Directory
YYY = the Program 04 station logical port
Numbers [SDNs]
number of the [DN] that should appear as a
[SDN] NNNN - 1, Highest button
##YYY
[SDN]. YYY should not be the same port
16 total [PDNs] +
[SDN] NNNN - 2, next highest
##YYY
number as the port number (XXX) of the
[SDNs];
[SDN] NNNN - 3, next highest
##YYY
telephone on which the [SDN] is assigned.
[SDN] NNNN - 4, Lowest button
##YYY
4-Maximum of same
NNNN is the actual DN assignment for Port
[SDN] per telephone
YYY in Program 04.
Phantom Directory
Numbers [PhDNs]
ZZZ = the Program *04 Port ref. number of the
[PhDN]. NNNN is the actual [DN] assignment
8-Maximum unique
for Port ZZZ in Program *04. Each [PhDN]
[PhDNs]
[PhDN] NNNN
##ZZZ
must have an owner telephone assigned in
1-Maximum of same
Program *33. If an owner is not assigned, the
[PhDN] per
[PhDN] can originate but cannot receive calls.
telephone
Phantom Directory
Number Message
[PhDN/MW] - 1 Lowest [PhDN]
423
Message Waiting Key for [PhDNs] assigned to
Waiting button
[PhDN/MW] - 2 Next Highest
424
telephone. Telephone must be assigned as
[PhDN]
[PhDN/MW] - 3 Next Highest
425
[PhDN] owner in Program *33 to allow it to be
4- maximum [PhDN/
[PhDN/MW] - 4 Highest [PhDN]
426
equipped with a [PhDN/MW] button.
MW] per telephone
Directory Number Programming Example
Program *33: Assign Station Logical Port 000 as owner of [PhDN] 500 and 502.
Assign Station Logical Port 001 as owner of [PhDN] 501.
Program 04
Port No.
Directory
XXX
No.
PhDN 4502
MW 4502
and
[PDN/SDN]
ZZZ = 502
Code = 424
YYY
NNNN
PhDN 4501
ZZZ = 501
PhDN 4501
MW4501
000
3200
001
3201
ZZZ = 500
PhDN 4500
MW 4500
Code = 423
PhDN 4500
002
3202
YYY = 002
SDN 3202
CO 10
SDN 3203
CO 11
003
3203
ZZZ = 501
SDN 3201-1
CO 9
SDN 3200-1
CO 10
Program
YYY = 001
*04
ZZZ = 500
SDN 3201-2
CO 3
SDN 3200-2
CO 9
Port No. Directory
YYY = 003
ZZZ
No. [PhDN]
PDN 3200-1
CO 2
PDN 3200-3
CO 3
NNNN
YYY = 000
500
4500
YYY = 000
PDN 3200-2
CO 1
PDN 3201-1
CO 2
YYY = 001
501
4501
PDN 3200-3
PDN 3201-2
CO 1
502
4502
503
4503
Station 3200
Station 3201
Port 000
Port 001
1569
XXX= 000
XXX= 001
3-120
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
The total number of [DNs] allowed on a telephone ([PDN], [SDNs], and [PhDNs]) is limited
to the number of buttons on the telephone (i.e., a 20-button telephone can have 20 [DN]
buttons).
The number of [SDN] buttons programmed on a telephone for a given Primary Directory
Number must always be the same as the number of [PDN] buttons that exist on the [PDN]
owner telephone.
Example: If [PDN] 200 appears on 3 buttons on station 200, and [SDN] 200 should appear on
station 201, then [SDN] 200 must appear on 3-buttons on station 201. Never put more (or less)
[SDN] buttons of the same Directory Number on a telephone than [PDN] buttons that appear
on the [PDN] owner telephone. If this guideline is not followed, calls to the [PDN] telephone
will be missed on the [SDN] telephone.
The maximum number of [PDNs] and [PhDNs] per system is listed below:
Processor
Max. [PDNs]/[PhDNs]
Processor
Max. [PDNs]/[PhDNs]
DK14
10
B1CU
56
DK40i
27
B2CAU/BU
112
RCTUA 32
B3CAU/BU
192
RCTUBA/BB 80
B5CAU/BU
336
RCTUC/D
240
RCTUE/F
336
[PhDN] can appear on all Toshiba telephones in the system, but a [PhDN] is limited to ring on
120 telephones maximum.
System & Station
Phantom [DN] owner telephones have the following attributes:
Set Call Forward for [PhDNs]
Set Call Forward Mail Box destinations (VM ID codes) for [PhDNs]
Receive Message Waiting indication for up to four Phantom Directory Numbers on
individual [PhDN/MW] button LEDs
When off-hook, the [PhDN] telephone owner will receive OCA calls directed to a busy the
[PhDN].
[PDN] and/or [PhDN] Call Forward/Message retrieval can only be set/received from the
[PDN] and/or [PhDN] owner telephone.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-121

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Alert Signal Button Assignments

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Enter the logical port number of the
YYY = the Program 39 code for the $OHUW
telephone that will be assigned an
6LJQDO button that should be installed.
$OHUW 6LJQDO button.
Press the telephone button to which $OHUW
6LJQDO should be assigned.
Station Number: _______
Alert Signal Button
Alert Signal Button Partner Station
Button Number (01~20)
Speed Dial Number
Number
No.
Code
1
427
2
428
3
429
4
430
Station Number: _______
Alert Signal Button
Alert Signal Button Partner Station
Button Number (01~20)
Speed Dial Number
Number
No.
Code
1
427
2
428
3
429
4
430
The Alert Signal is four short bursts of tone, sent two times/three seconds apart from one partner
station when the other partner station when one of the partners presses the $OHUW 6LJQDO button on
their telephone. An Alert Signal can be sent to stations that are idle or busy, or in Call Forward or
Do Not Disturb mode. No talk path will exist before or after the Alert Signal is activated.
Important!
Both partner stations must have the same Alert Signal button number programmed in Program
39 and the appropriate Speed Dial Number programmed to allow the Alert Signal buttons to
operate.
Strata AirLink does not support this feature.
3-122
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
Alert Signal Button Programming Example
Station 200
Station 202
Code
= 427
Signal 1
Code
= 427
Signal 1
SD *48 = 202
SD *48 = 200
Code
= 428
Code
= 428
Signal 2
Signal 2
SD *47 = 203
SD *47 = 201
Code
= 430
Signal 4
SD *45 = 204
Station 203
Code
= 427
Signal 1
SD *48 = 201
Station 201
Code
= 428
Signal 2
SD
= 200
Code
= 427
*47
Signal 1
SD *48 = 203
Code
= 428
Signal 2
Station 204
SD *47 = 202
Code
= 429
Signal 3
Code
= 429
SD
= 201
Signal 3
*46
SD *46 = 204
Code
= 430
Signal 4
SD *45 = 200
1571
System & Station
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-123

System & Station
Program *40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments
Program *40 Distributed Hunt Group Member
Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: No member (station port) assigned to any DH Group

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Distributed Hunt (DH)
DATA = Hunt Port Number
Group Number (see legend)
When editing the data field, use LED
Hunt order (01~32)
Button 01 to delete a number.
Processor
DH Port Range
Hunt Port Range
Processor
DH Port Range
Hunt Port Range
DK14
900~915
000~009
B1CU
900~915
000~055
DK40i
900~915
000~027
B2CAU/BU
900~915
000~111
RCTUA
900~915
000~031
B3CAU/BU
900~915
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
900~915
000~079
B2CAU/BU
900~915
000~055
RCTUC/D 900~915
000~239
B5CAU/BU
900~915
000~335
RCTUE/F
900~915
000~335
DH Port
Hunt Order
Hunt Port
DH Port
Hunt Order
Hunt Port
DH Port
Hunt Order
Hunt Port
(900~915)
(01-32)
Number
(900~915)
(01-32)
Number
(900~915)
(01-32)
Number
3-124
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments
Program *40 Overview
This program assigns the members (station primary [DN] port numbers and hunting orders
[01~32] of Distributed Hunt (DH) groups [900~915]). When a member of a DH group is added or
deleted, all the other members' hunting orders are automatically shifted to a new sequential order.
If Ground/Loop start CO lines ring DH Group member telephones, use Program 81~89 to assign
the selected CO lines to ring the DH group (900~915); do not use *81, *84, and *87 to assign
[PDNs] or [PhDNs] to flash and ring on the DH Group member telephones. Instead, put the CO
lines in a pooled line group and put the appropriate 3RROHG /LQH *US buttons on the DH member
telephones. Do not assign DH Group member telephones to ring in Program 81~89.
To assign ANI/DNIS/DID/Tie and Internal calls to ring DH groups, use Program *04, *09,
*71~*73, or 71 (1~3) as required and do not put DID or Tie line pooled or direct line buttons on
DH member telephones. These calls ring the DH member telephone [PDN].
Each port assigned to a Program 31 Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a dedicated
Distributed Hunt Group. (See Program 31 record sheet overview for Voice Mail/Distributed Hunt
program example.)
System & Station
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-125

System & Station
Program *41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)
Program *41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)
Processor Type:
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU and B5CAU/BU
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: See each program
Series Overview
Use Program *41 (Part 1) and *42 (Part 2) series to set T1 parameters and assignments on the
DK424. See the Strata DK Configuration and T1 sections for additional T1 information. RDTU
support is as follows:
Number of RDTU's
Processor
Supported
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
2
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
6
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
8
Program *41-1 T1 Span (RDTU) Frame and Line Code Assignments
Initialized Default: LED 01 and LED 02 Off for all T1 span lines

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
LEDs 01 and 02
Select the RDTU being
Set as described below.
programmed (1~8)
Extended Superframe
Superframe
B8ZS
AMI Code
T1 Span
LED 01 On
LED 01 Off
LED 02 On
LED 02 Off
1 RDTU
2 RDTU
3 RDTU
4 RDTU
5 RDTU
6 RDTU
7 RDTU
8 RDTU
Program *41-1 Overview
T1 Span Framing Assignments: Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for Superframe
(LED 01 Off) or Extended Superframe (LED 01 On).
T1 Span Line Code Assignments: Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for B8ZS
(LED 02 On) or AMI coding (LED 02 Off).
3-126
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)
Program *41-2 T1 Channel Assignments
Initialized Default: 1 = Loop Start
More channels

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Turn System Power Off (5 sec) then On
or...
SELECT = 2
Run Program 91-2
Enter the RDTU being programmed (1~8).
Enter the RDTU channel number (01~24)
Enter the line type to be assigned to the RDTU channel:
to be assigned a line type.
1 = Loop Start (initialized) 4 = Tie (Wink)
To add a port range, enter XXXXXX
2 = Ground Start
5 = DID (immediate)
(low port high port).
3 = Tie (immediate)
6 = DID (Wink)
See Programs 17 and 71 for other Tie/DID assignments.
See Program *17 and Program *09 for other DID assignments.
Processor Type
CO Line Range
Processor Type
CO Line Range
DK40i
001~012
B1CU
001~032
RCTUA
001~016
B2CAU/BU
001~120
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
B3CAU/BU
001~120
RCTUC/D
001~144
B5CAU/BU
001~200
RCTUE/F
001~200
RDTU:___________
Slot:___________
RDTU:___________
Slot:___________
RDTU:___________
Slot:___________
System & Station
RDTU Channel No.
Line Type
RDTU Channel No.
Line Type
RDTU Channel No.
Line Type
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
24
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-127

System & Station
Program *41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)
Important!
See Program 17 for other Tie/DID assignments; see Program *17 and Program *09
for other DID assignments.
Notes
You must cycle system power or run Program 91-2 to transfer Program *41-2 data from
temporary memory to working memory. Turn system power Off (five seconds) and On after
running Program *41-2.
Always install RDTU PCBs that have Tie or DID channels in slot numbers that are higher than
station and Attendant Console PCB slot numbers whenever possible. Each Tie or DID line
installed uses a station port in software (see the Configuration worksheets for Tie/DID
configuration in the Strata DK I&M Manual).
Program *41-2 Overview
RDTUs provide 8, 16, or 24 channels as set in Program 03. Each channel can operate
independently as CO lines (ground start or loop start), Tie lines (Wink or Immediate Start), or DID
lines (Wink or Immediate Start). Assign the number of channels for each RDTU with Program 03.
Important!
Program 91-2 must be run or System Power must be momentarily turned Off (five
seconds) then On for Program *41-2 to take effect.
Program *41-3 T1 Span Transmit Level Pad Assignments
Initialized Default: 5 (-6dB)

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 3
Enter one of the following pad codes for the
transmission of path:
Enter the RDTU being
programmed (1~8).
1 = +6 dB pad
2 = +3 dB pad
3 = 0 dB pad
4 = -3 dB pad
RDTU No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 = -6 dB pad (Initialized: PAD_S = 5)
PAD Code
6 = -9 dB pad
7 = -12 dB pad
8 = -15 dB pad
Program *41-3 Overview
The transmission path of each RDTU can be set for one of several pad settings:
Code
Decibel Level
Code
Decibel Level
Enter 1
+6 decibel (dB) padding
Enter 5
-6 dB (initialized setting)
Enter 2
+3 dB
Enter 6
-9 dB
Enter 3
0 dB
Enter 7
-12 dB
Enter 4
-3 dB
Enter 8
-15 dB
3-128
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)
Program *41-4 T1 Span Receive Level Pad Assignments
Initialized Default: 4 (-3dB)

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 4
Enter one of the following pad codes for the
transmission of path:
Enter the RDTU being
programmed (1~8).
1 = +6 dB pad
2 = +3 dB pad
3 = 0 dB pad
4 = -3 dB pad
RDTU No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 = -6 dB pad (Initialized: PAD_R = 4)
6 = -9 dB pad
PAD Code
7 = -12 dB pad
8 = -15 dB pad
Note
See "Program *41-3 Overview" on Page 3-128 above for decibel levels.
System & Station
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-129

System & Station
Program *42-1 Primary Timing Reference Assignments (Release 3.1 and earlier)
Program *42-1 Primary Timing Reference
Assignments (Release 3.1 and earlier)
Initialized Default: Primary = 1, Secondary = 2

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SEL = 1 or 2
RDTU PCB Number (1~8)
1 - Primary Source
Enter the RDTU PCB number that is connected to the
2 - Secondary Source
primary reference T1 (span line) clock source.
Press LED Button 01 (blank) if the DK T1 is the master
(free run) clock source.
Select
RDTU PCB Number
Primary
Secondary
Program *42 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series (Part 2)
See "Program *42 Clock Source" on Page 7-16.
Program *42-1 Overview (Release 3.1 and earlier)
Assign the Primary Timing Reference with this program.
Note
RDTU No. 1 is the RDTU PCB installed in the lowest slot number of all RDTU PCBs,
RDTU No. 2 is the RDTU PCB installed in the next highest slot number of all RDTUs and
so on.
DK
Span Line
(Primary clock source)
Program Data
RDTU in
Central Office
T1 Primary PCB
4 2 - 1 1 >
Slot 13
RBOC CO lines

Span Line
Program Data
RDTU in
(Secondary clock source)
AT&T or MCI
T1 Secondary PCB
4 2 - 2 2 >
Slot 25
Long Distance Lines

1863
Primary/Back-Up Assignments Example
Note
A second RBOC T1 span line can also be used as the secondary clock source.
DK Master (free run) Assignment Example
DK
Span Line
(DK424 clock source)
Other DK
Slot 13
T1 PCB
or PBX, etc
Program Data = blank button (Button 01)
for 4 2 - 1 and 4 2 - 2
1864

Program *42-2 Overview (Release 3.1 and earlier)
Assign the Secondary (Backup) Timing Reference with this program.
Note
To assign RDTUs as the Master Clock Reference (free run), leave Programs 42-1 and
42-2 blank. Press button/LED 01 to enter blanks.
3-130
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs
Program *50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO
Line PCBs
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: No RCIU/RCIS circuits assigned

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Run Program 91-2
Processor
CO Line Range
DK14
001~004
System power must be cycled or Program 91-2 must
be run after completing *50 data entry to transfer
DK40i
001~012
data from temporary memory to working memory.
RCTUA
001~016
CIUNO = RCIU/RCISU Caller ID circuit number
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
(001~200) or use LED Button 01 to erase data. For
RCTUC/D
001~144
DK14, enter the Caller ID interface box line number
RCTUE/F
001~200
(001~004).
B1CU
001~032
Any Caller ID circuit can be assigned to any analog
B2CAU/BU
000~120
ground or loop start CO line circuit. Circuit numbers
B3CAU/BU
000~120
do not have to match.
B5CAU/BU
000~200
RCIU/RCIS Circuit
RCIU/RCIS Circuit
RCIU/RCIS Circuit
System & Station
CO Line Number
CO Line Number
CO Line Number
Number Assigned
Number Assigned
Number Assigned
Note
The Tip/Ring leads of RGLU, RCOU, RCOS, and PCOU Caller ID CO lines assigned to
RCIU2/RCIS circuits must be bridged at the MDF. The Tip/Ring leads of TCOU and
TCIU2 are bridged by the PCB connectors in the DK40i Base KSU.
For more information on RCIU/RCIS assignments and installation, refer to Chapter 7
Universal Slot PCB Installation and Chapter 8 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Diagrams in
the Strata DK I&M Manual.
On DK14, the Tip/Ring leads of the CO line circuit must be connected to the line Tip/Ring
leads of the Caller ID interface box. (See Chapter 1 DK14 Installation, Figure 1-18 and
the Caller ID text under "WSIU1 Serial Interface Board" in the Strata DK I&M Manual.)
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-131

System & Station
Program *50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs
Program *50 Overview
In DK40i and DK424, each analog ground/loop start CO line that receives Caller ID information
from the local Central Office must be assigned to an RCIU or RCIS circuit using this program.
In DK14, each CO line that receives Caller ID must be assigned an MLX-41 interface box circuit
number. For information regarding the MLX-41, see Chapter 1 - DK14 Installation in the Strata
DK I&M Manual. This is necessary to allow Caller ID information to be recognized by the DK
system processor. Any RCIU, RCIS or MLX-41 circuit can be assigned to any analog ground/loop
start CO line circuit.
Each RCIU slot will be allocated eight Caller ID circuits when assigned with Code 81 in Program
03; because of this, you should always install RCIS on RCIU when more than four circuits are
required. TCIU2 allocates four Caller ID circuits to TCOU.
3-132
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *51 Station Memory Allocation
Program *51 Station Memory Allocation
for Storing Caller ID/ANI Numbers on Abandoned/
Unanswered Calls
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: No memory for all ports

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Processor
Station Ports
BUF = 000, 010, 020, 030, 040, 060, 070, 080,
090 or 100.
DK14
000~007
DK40i
000~027
This is the number of telephone numbers that can
be stored at the designated port(s). The
RCTUA
000~031
maximum Caller ID/ANI numbers that can be
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
stored per telephone is 100.
RCTUC/D
000~239
IDL = Total number of Caller ID/ANI Telephone
RCTUE/F
000~335
Numbers Available in each system
B1CU
000~055
DK14
200
B2CAU/BU
000~111
DK40i
200
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUA
200
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
400
To add a port range, enter
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
1000
System & Station
XXXXXX (low port high port).
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
2000
Station Logical
Memory Allocation
Station Logical
Memory Allocation
Station Logical
Memory Allocation
Port Number
(100 max each)
Port Number
(100 max each)
Port Number
(100 max each)
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-133

System & Station
Program *51 Station Memory Allocation
Program *51 Overview
Use this program to allocate "Abandon-Call-Memory" when any LCD telephone must store
abandon call information for Caller ID, Ground/Loop start line and/or ANI, DID/Tie lines.
On direct incoming calls that ring on more than one telephone, the Caller ID, Ground/Loop start,
line must also be assigned to the designated abandon call storage LCD telephone in Program *52.
If a CO line only direct-rings one telephone, that telephone will store the abandoned call
information automatically without being assigned in Program *52; however, Program *51 is still
required.
The IDL memory allocation displays on the program telephone's LCD, indicating the total number
of telephone numbers that can be stored at the designated port(s). These numbers are reduced
accordingly each time memory is allocated to a station.
On direct incoming calls, the ANI abandon call information is stored in the "Abandon-Call-
Memory" of the [PDN] owner or [PhDN] owner LCD telephone - depending on which [DN] rings
when the call is received. Do not assign ANI/DNIS lines in Program *52.
Abandoned "Call-forwarded" calls will store Caller ID and/or ANI information in the "Abandon-
Call-Memory" of the "first-call-forwarded-from-station". The "first-call-forwarded-from-station"
does not have to be assigned as the owner of the CO line in program *52 or as the owner of the
[PhDN] in Program *33, but it must be assigned memory in this program.
Distributed Hunt Queue or DISA line, Abandoned Calls store ANI/Caller ID data in the Program
*52 CO line owner station.
If a Caller ID CO line is programmed to direct ring more than one station (81~89) a station logical
port must be assigned as owner of the ground and/or loop start Caller ID line (in Program *52) to
be able to store Caller ID numbers on abandoned or unanswered calls on Direct Incoming calls.
If a Caller ID CO line is programmed (81~89) to ring only one station, that station will store Caller
ID abandoned call information regardless of Program *52 data - the station must have storing
memory assigned in Program *51. ANI abandoned call numbers will be stored in the telephone
memory of the called Primary Directory Number [PDN] owner telephone or the called Phantom
Directory Number [PhDN] owner telephone.
Transferred Caller ID and/or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the "transferred-
to" telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program. (see Program *52).
Call forwarded Caller ID and/or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the [PDN] or
[PhDN] owner telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program.
ACD calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned while connected to an
Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call answered by the ACD
announcement [DN], Auto Attendant [DN], or Voice Mail [DN].
3-134
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program *52 Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments
Program *52 Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number
Station Owner Assignments
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: No station owners assigned

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = Caller ID or ANI CO Line Number
CLASS OWNER = the station port number that
should store Abandon Call Numbers for the Caller
To add a range of line numbers, enter
ID or ANI CO Line(s) entered.
XXXXXX (low port high port).
Press LED Button 01 to erase data.
Processor
CO Line Range
[PDN] Port Range
Processor
CO Line Range
[PDN] Port Range
DK14
001~004
000~009
B1CU
001~032
000~055
DK40i
001~012
000~027
B2CAU/BU
001~120
000~111
RCTUA
001~016
000~031
B3CAU/BU
001~120
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
001~048
000~079
B5CAU/BU
001~200
000~335
RCTUC/D
001~144
000~239
RCTUE/F
001~200
000~335
CLID/ANI
Station Owner
CLID/ANI
Station Owner
CLID/ANI
Station Owner
CLID/ANI
Station Owner
System & Station
CO Line
Port Number
CO Line
Port Number
CO Line
Port Number
CO Line
Port Number
Number
Assigned
Number
Assigned
Number
Assigned
Number
Assigned
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-135

System & Station
Program *52 Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments
Program *52 Overview
Use this program for any LCD telephone that must store abandon call information for Caller ID,
Ground/Loop start lines and/or ANI, DID/Tie lines must be allocated "Abandon-Call-Memory"
LCD telephones can be allocated memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10 number increments (see
IDL totals).
When Caller ID and ANI lines ring into the Strata DK system and the caller hangs-up before the
call is answered, the call is considered abandoned. In this case, the Caller ID and ANI information
received can be stored at a designated LCD telephone. When a Caller ID line rings at more than
one telephone (Program 81-89), the LCD telephone that should store the Caller ID information for
that line must be programmed as the owner of that Caller ID line using this program.
When a Caller ID line rings only one LCD telephone (Program 81-89), the abandoned call Caller
ID information will be stored at that LCD telephone regardless of the Program *52 assignment.
The number of abandoned calls the station can store is set in Program *51.
An LCD telephone can be assigned as owner of any number of Caller ID lines. A Caller ID line
can only be assigned to one owner LCD telephone.
If a Caller ID CO line or ANI Tie/DID line is answered by the, Distributed Hunt group queue, or
DISA line, and if this call is abandoned before it is routed to and rings a station, the Caller ID or
ANI data will be stored in the abandoned call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller
ID or ANI line assigned in this program.
Notes
Abandoned "call-forwarded" calls will store Caller ID information in the "Abandon-Call-
Memory" of the "first-call-forwarded-from-station". The "first-call-forwarded-from-station"
does not have to be assigned to the CO line in this program. To store abandon call information
for CO lines, the station must also be allocated "Abandon Call Memory" in Program *51.
If a Caller ID CO line is answered by the Strata DK Distributed Hunt Group Queue or DISA
line, and if this call is abandoned before it is routed to and rings a station, the Caller ID data is
stored in the abandon call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller ID line assigned
in this program.
Tie/DID ANI lines store abandoned call ANI numbers on the Primary and/or Phantom
Directory Number owner telephones if they are allocated memory in Program *51. Tie/DID
ANI line calls that are abandoned while Distributed Hunt Group queue will store ANI
information on the station owner assigned in this program.
ACD or Auto Attendant calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned
while connected to an Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call
answered by the ACD announcement [DN], Auto Attendant [DN], or Voice Mail [DN].
3-136
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)
Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)
Processor Type:
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F, B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU, B5CAU/BU
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: See each program
Program 58-1 Attendant Console Overflow Timer
Initialized Default: 32 seconds

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
DATA = 011~999 seconds
DATA =
Program 58-1 Overview
Incoming Line Calls (not recalls) to attendant consoles will overflow to a designated attendant
console or station port (Program 58-5) if the call is not answered within the time (011~999
seconds) specified by this program. The overflow call will ring on either the ,Q7UDQV button
(assigned in Program 59) of the console that receives the overflow call, or the [DN] or CO /LQH
button of a station.
System & Station
Notes
This program sets overflow timer for all attendant consoles (1~4)
The overflow destination is assigned in Program 58-5.
Program 58-2 Attendant Console Display Type
Initialized Default: All LEDs Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 2
LED Button 01 On for EL or Off for EGA display
Console Number (1~4)
LED Button 02 On sets Answer Button operation for First In/
First Out (FIFO) or priority per Program 58-4
LED Button 03 On sets Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone
LED Button 04 On selects the PC Attendant Console; Off
selects the traditional Attendant Console
Button 01 LED
Button 02 LED
Button 03 LED
Button 04 LED
Attendant
On
Off
Off
Console
On
Off
On
Off (58-
On
(Call Waiting
(No Call
(Traditional
(EL)
(EGA)
(FIFO)
4)
(PC Attendant)
Tone)
Waiting Tone)
Console)
1
2
3
4
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-137

System & Station
Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)
Program 58-2 Overview
This program identifies in software the type of display connected to each console. It also enables
you to set priorities for types of incoming calls. You can also enable Call Waiting tones.
LED 01: Attendant Console Display Type
Base units can connect to an Electroluminescent (EL) display (LED 01 On) or Extended Graphics
Adapter (EGA) Display (LED 01 Off).
LED 02: Answer Button Operation
The attendant console $QVZHU button can be programmed to answer calls on either a First-in,
First-out (FIFO) or a Priority basis. With FIFO, new calls or recalls are stacked in queue in the
order in which they are received. This is true regardless of the type of call/recall (CO line,
Intercom, [DN] call or Hold Recall, etc.). The queued calls ring to the $QVZHU button in the order
in which they are received.
With Priority operation, each type of incoming call or recall (CO line call, [DN] call, Hold Recall
or Park Recall, etc.) is assigned a specific answering priority ranging from 1~6. (Call Priority is
flexible and is assigned in Program 58-4.) Calls will queue to the attendant in order of their
predetermined priority levels. For example, Priority Level 1 calls ring to the attendant before
Priority 2 calls; Priority 2 calls ring before Priority 3 calls, and so forth.
LED 03: Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone
Each attendant console can be programmed individually to receive a muted ring signal that will
alert the console that a new call is waiting while the console is busy on another call. If call waiting
tone is not enabled, new calls do not present an audible indication. The call waiting display always
displays the number of calls waiting to be answered.
LED 04: Speed Up PC Attendant Console LCD Display (Release 4.15 or higher)
When LED 04 is On, it speeds up the display for the PC Attendant Console (Version 4T and
higher). LED 04 Off is for the traditional Attendant Console LCD Display. The Default if Off.
Program 58-4 Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments
Initialized Default: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Highest Priority
Lowest Priority

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 4
Enter button numbers in priority order.
Console Number (1~4)
Button Name
Park-RC
Trans RC
Hold-RC
In-Trans
LINE
In Dial "O"
[PDN]
Button Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Program 58-4 Overview
Each incoming call or recall type can be assigned a specific $QVZHU button priority level, ranging
from 0~6. If the $QVZHU button is assigned Priority answer operation in Program 58-2, then
incoming calls/recalls will ring to the $QVZHU button based on their assigned priority levels.
Priority 1 calls have the highest priority while Priority 6 calls have the lowest.
3-138
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)
Notes
EMRG has first priority over the above key assignments.
See Program 59 for the function of each button.
Program 58-5 Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments
Initialized Default: Blank

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 5
Enter the overflow destination port number.
Console Number (1~4)
Console overflow destination =
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA
000~031
B3CAU/BU
000~191
RCTUBA/BB
000~079
B5CAU/BU
000~335
RCTUC/D
000~239
RCTUE/F
000~335
Program 58-5 Overview
System & Station
When the attendant console has been placed in the Overflow mode (via the 2YHUIORZ button), calls
queue to be answered based on the predetermined FIFO or priority basis. If a call remains in queue
for a period longer than the time period set for the Overflow Timer (set in Program 58-1), then the
call will overflow to the destination assigned in this program.
The assigned destination can be either a station, voice mail, auto attendant, or another attendant
console.
Calls that will overflow include ring transfer, incoming CO /LQH, GLDO "", and $WWG &DOO
button calls; Transfer Recall (,Q7UDQV) and +ROG recall will not overflow.
Overflow recall time is set in Program 58-1.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-139

System & Station
Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes
Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button
Codes
Processor Type:
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU and B5CAU/BU
Program Type:
Station
Initialized Default: Given throughout this section

6SNU + ROG
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
Attendant Console (1~4)
DATA = Button Code
See legend.
1 = Left
2 = Right
Press LED Buttons 01~12 on Programming Telephone to
enter data for corresponding console button.
Codes (Left Buttons 1~12)
Codes (Right Buttons 1~12)
Split (295)
Join Loop (239)
Sup. Loop (296)
Conf (297)
Overflow (299)
Night (439)
In-Emrg (261)
In-DN (257)
In-Dial "0" (262)
Redial (496)
Spdial (497)
SD13 (*13)
In-Trans (258)
Trans-RC (260)
Hold-RC (259)
BLF (298)
Out Dial (294)
SD12 (*12)
In-LG3 (243)
In-LG2 (242)
In-LG1 (241)
Attd Call (000)
SD10 (*10)
SD11 (*11)
Console 1
Left
Right
10
11
12
10
11
12
07
08
09
07
08
09
04
05
06
04
05
06
01
02
03
01
02
03
Console 2
Left
Right
10
11
12
10
11
12
07
08
09
07
08
09
04
05
06
04
05
06
01
02
03
01
02
03
Console 3
Left
Right
10
11
12
10
11
12
07
08
09
07
08
09
04
05
06
04
05
06
01
02
03
01
02
03
Console 4
Left
Right
10
11
12
10
11
12
07
08
09
07
08
09
04
05
06
04
05
06
01
02
03
01
02
03
3-140
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes
Program 59 Overview
Attendant Consoles have 24 flexible buttons (12 on left and 12 on the right side of the dial pad).
This program is used to assign each button to an available function or options. Program 59 record
sheets define the button options (and codes) available.
Table 3-4
Required PC Attendant Console Button Codes
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Conference
Conf
297
Starts conference calls.
Hold Recall
Hold-RC
259
Held calls recall on this button.
Incoming Dial "0"
In-Dial "0"
262
Dial "0" calls ring in on this button.
Incoming calls to the console DN ring on
this button. The console [DN] is the Prog
Incoming Directory Number
In-DN
257
04 assignment of the Prog 04 console
port number.
Incoming Ring Transfer
In-Trans
258
Receive call transfer.
Join-Loop
Join-Loop
293
Connects any held call to an existing call.
Switches ATTD consoles dial pad from
Out Dial
Out Dial
294
digital to tone mode.
Redial Last Number ( )
Redial or RDL
496
Redials the last number.
Releases current call and makes station
Release to Idle
Release Call or RLS
476
idle.
Speed Dial Select ()
Speed Dial or SDS
497
Begins speed dial selection.
Allows attendant to talk to either party
Split Call
Split
295
separately on a conference call.
System & Station
Places call on attendant hold loop key so
Supervised Loop
Sup Loop
296
attendant can supervise call.
No answer transferred calls, recall on this
Transfer Recall
Trans-RC
260
button.
Can originate calls on this button. The
Attendant Call
Attd Call
000
Attendant Call LED is lit red any time the
attendant talk path is connected.
Table 3-5
Recommended PC Attendant Console Button Codes
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Display BLF
BLF
298
Displays BLF on CRT or EL display.
Indicates to all consoles an incoming
Incoming Emergency
In-Emrg
261
emergency call.
Indicates a message from station or VM
device to Attendant. Disconnects and
Message Waiting/Flash
Msg Wait, Flash or MW/FL
499
recalls dial tone on CO line; accesses
Centrex or PBX features; enters pause or
flash during speed dial programming.
Overflow
Overflow
299
Places console in the call overflow mode.
Park Recall
Park-RC
263
Parked calls recall on this button.
Table 3-6
Incoming Line Group Button Assignments
In-LG1~241
In-LG5~245
In-LG9~249
In-LG13~253
In-LG2~242
In-LG6~246
In-LG10~250
In-LG14~254
In-LG3~243
In-LG7~247
In-LG11~251
In-LG15~255
In-LG4~244
In-LG8~248
In-LG12~252
In-LG16~256
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-141

System & Station
Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes
Table 3-7
Optional Attendant Console Button Codes
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Alarm
Alarm Reset or ALRM
477
Resets alarm condition system-wide.
Call Pickup Tenant 1~Call
PKUP 1~PKUP 4
435~438
Picks up tenant 3's ringing CO calls.
Pickup Tenant 4
CO line access of appearing calls. CO
line ranges vary according to processor:
CO Line Appearance
Line 1~48
001~048
RCTUBA/BB
Line 1~144
001~144
RCTUC/D
Line 1~200
001~200
RCTUE/F
Momentarily unlocks door (3 or 6
Door Lock 0~Door Lock 4
seconds). The PC attendant activates
DRLK 0~4
471~475
(DDCB/HDCB)
these options when these buttons are
assigned.
Activates ALL CALL Paging to telephone
Emergency Page Access
Emrg Page
292
speakers (not EXTR Page). Overrides
any existing ALL CALL page.
Night Transfer
Night Transfer1 or NT1~Night
Sets Tenant 1 CO line DAY/NIGHT ring
439~442
Tenant 1~Tenant 4
Transfer4 or NT4
mode.
Prevents Privacy Override (not Executive
Privacy
Privacy On Line or PRIV
453
Override).
Changes station Privacy mode to Non-
Privacy Release
Privacy Release or PRV RLS
479
private for CO lines.
Sets pause in Speed dial (see Program
Pause
Spd Dial Pause or PAU
495
12-3.)
Pause (Long)
Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU/L
493
Sets a 10-second pause in Speed Dial.
Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and/or
Unanswered Caller ID and/
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
or ANI Stored Number Auto
Lost Call Auto Dial or LCAD
462
telephone number that was stored in
Dial
station Caller ID/ANI memory.

Table 3-8
Additional Feature Button Codes
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Allows a Voluntary Account Code to be
Account Code
Account Code or ACCNT
450
entered.
Console can alert another station but
Alert Signaling
Alert 1~4
427~430
another station cannot alert the console.
See Program 39 for more information.
Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital
All Call Voice Page
All Call Page or AC
489
telephones over speaker.
Automatic Busy Redial
Auto Busy Redial or ABR
470
Sets ABR of busy outgoing number.
Automatic Callback Busy
Auto Callback or ACB
494
Sets ACB for station recalled by busy line.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC
487
All calls forward to selected station.
Forwards all calls to pre-defined
Call Forward A.C. Fixed
Call Frwd to: or CFF
486
destination. See Program 36.
Forwards calls to selected station if
Call Forward Busy
Call Frwd Busy or CFB
459
station is busy.
Call Forward Busy/
Forwards calls to selected station if
Call Frwd Busy/NAns or CFB/NA
457
No Answer
station is busy or does not answer.
Call Forward External
Call Frwd External or CF-EXT
460
Forward calls externally.
Forwards calls to selected station if
Call Forward No Answer
Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA
458
station does not answer.
Call Park
Park in Orbit or PARK
464
Call Park Only.
CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be
Call Park LCD Display
Park Orbit DIsplay or CPD
465
used interchangeably. Displays call
parked via telephone LCD.
3-142
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes
Table 3-8
Additional Feature Button Codes (continued)
Button Function
Button Labels
Code
Notes
Call Park and Page
Call Park/Page or CP/PG
463
Parking and Paging Park Pickup.
Picks up ringing or held intercom, trunk
Call Pickup (Directed)
Directed Pickup or PKUP
484
calls, and page.
Picks up a call to any group to which
Call Pickup (Group)4
Group Pickup
480
station is assigned in *31.
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb or DND
498
Prevents calls to station.
Separates the called party's ISDN sub-
address from the called party number.
ISDN Sub-address
Sub-address
467
The digit performs this function on
standard telephones.
Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the
ISDN network when this button is pressed
from a digital or electronic telephone.
ISDN Start
Start
469
Program *63-2 invokes the same function
when the Dial Timer expires. Also see
Tone Button in this table.
LCD Message Select
LCD Msg Select or LCD M
481
Begins LCD message selection.
Night Transfer Lock
Used to lock system ringing mode: DAY,
Night Lock1 or NT1 L1~Night Lock4
Tenant 1~Night Transfer
431~434
DAY2, NIGHT See Programs 74 and *36
or NT4 L4
Lock Tenant 4
for NT Lock Password assignments.
Simulates On-hook/Off-hook operation to
Release and Answer
Release and Ans and RLS/ANS
466
release an existing call and answer new
incoming/ringing call.
Saves last number dialed for future speed
Save Last Dialed Number
Save Last Number or SAVE
485
dial.
System & Station
Reserves button for station speed dial for
the following processors:
Station Speed Dial Codes
SD
*10~*49
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
*10~*49
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
*100~*139
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
Speed dial number is set by station port
000.
System Speed Dial Codes
SD
*600~*699
RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
*600~*699
RCTUC/D, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
*200~*999
RCTUE/F, B5CAU/BU
CO dial signals set to tone or pulse.
For ISDN applications, after the user
Tone
Tone Dial Select or TONE
490
presses the Tone Dial Select button, any
digits dialed after it is will be sent using
DTMF tones.
Notes116
See Program *15 for Tenant Group assignments.
Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in
Program *31.
Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with [SDNs] or [PhDNs]. The console [DN] is
assigned to the console port number in Program 04. The console's [DN] can have only one
appearance.
Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with [PDNs], [SDNs], or [PhDNs]. The [In-DN]
button is the console's [DN], assigned in Program 04; it supports incoming calls only and can
only appear once on a console.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-143

System & Station
Program 60-1 SMDR Data Output Options
Program 60-1 SMDR Data Output Options
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: LED 01 Off

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 1
Light the LED Buttons that are marked
with an X in the table below.
LED/
X
LED On
LED Off
Button
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
Caller ID, ANI and DNIS data will be sent from the
Account code data will be sent from the system
01
system SMDR port
SMDR port
Program 60-1 Overview
Program 60-1 determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port: System
Account codes or Caller ID and/or ANI telephone numbers.
Turn LED 01 On if received Caller ID and/or ANI information should be sent out the system
SMDR port.
Turn LED 01 Off if Account Code information should be sent out the system SMDR port.
Note
LED 01 determines if received Caller ID and/or ANI information (LED 01 On) or data is
sent out the SMDR port. This data is output on the last 15-digit (right hand) field columns
of the SMDR print out.
3-144
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 60-2~7 SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length
Program 60-2~7 SMDR Output/Account Code Digit
Length
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: Item 2: 10 seconds
Item 3: SMDR output is enabled for answered incoming/outgoing calls
Item 4: a 6-digit length is assigned to all Forced/Voluntary Account Codes
Item 7: 21 digits

6SNU +ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
SELECT = 2~7 (Item)
See table below.
Make a selection from
the table below.
Item
Description
Data
SMDR Threshold Time
Time
2
0 =1 second
1 = 10 seconds
SMDR Output when a call is completed
SMDR COR
3
0 = Outgoing Only
1 = Incoming and Outgoing
System & Station
Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length 04~15
Account
4
(See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes)
Digits are verified per Program 30, Button/LED 14 and Program 69
SMDR Printout Options
Toll Dial Data
Toll Dial:
0 = All Calls (item 3, printout outgoing call only is still available)
1 = Dial "0" calls only
5
2 = Dial "1" calls only
3 = Dial "00" calls only
4 = Dial "1", "0" calls only
5 = Dial "1", "00" calls only
DISA Security Code
Data
01~15 digits, may be changed from station, per Program 30
Button 01 = blank
6
If a security code is not programmed, outgoing trunk access via DISA
Button 02 is wild card
will not require a security code when dialing.
(any digit from 1~9)
Credit
Number of digits required
when "0" is the first digit
dialed; if this number of
digits is not dialed, the
Credit Card Call Digit Length, 01~30 digits
system will disconnect the
7
(see Program 43)
call after 20 seconds. "0" is
counted as a digit.
Example: 0 + 714 + 583 -
3700 = 11 digits; 11 should
be programmed as a
minimum in this case.
Strata DK Programming 5/00
3-145

System & Station
Program 60-2~7 SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length
Program 60-2-7 Overview
This program assigns the type of data to send to the Station Message Detail Report (SMDR).
Item 2: SMDR Threshold Time
The time that a call must be in progress before it will register with SMDR can be set to 1 or 10
seconds.
Item 3: SMDR Output
System output to a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device can include information for
both incoming and outgoing calls, or only for outgoing calls. Local and long distance call data will
be sent out.
Item 4: Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length
The Account Code entered at a station can vary in length from 4~15 digits. For Forced Account
Code use, a call will not be completed unless the specified number of digits is entered by a station
user. In the case of Voluntary Account Codes, the Account Code will not be sent to the SMDR call
record unless the specified number of digits is dialed. Initialized data assigns a six-digit length for
all Account Codes. See Program 60-1 and Program 69 for Verified Account Codes.
Item 5: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Printout Options
This option selectively deletes local call data and allows long distance/toll call data only to be sent
out the SMDR port. The type of long distance/toll call data that prints out is selected by long
distance prefix codes 0, 1, 00, or 1 or 0.
Item 6: Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Security Code
The optional security code (1~15 digits) is required for incoming DISA calls to access outgoing
CO lines. If the DISA security code is not set in programming, DISA users can access outgoing
lines without dialing a security code. This code is not required for DISA internal calls to stations.
The DISA security code can also be changed from stations enabled in Program 30. If the DK280
built-in Auto Attendant is installed, make sure to program a DISA security code to prevent Auto
Attendant callers from making unauthorized external DISA calls by using the DISA access feature
(Dial ).
Item 7: Credit Card Call Digit Length
Station users bypassing Toll Restriction with the "0 +" Credit Card Calling feature (Program 43)
must dial a predetermined number of digits including the "0." This predetermined number is
established with Item 7, and can be 1~30 digits. Set 11 digits in this program when using LCR.
Notes
If PBX code is dialed, numbers dialed after the code will be checked.
If A/C, O/C or SPCC code begins with "0", "1", or "00", that call will print out.
When accessing LCR feature, all digits sent to CO will be output.
3-146
Strata DK Programming 5/00

System & Station
Program 60-8 Call Forward External (Remote Change, Security) ID Code
Program 60-8 Call Forward External (Remote
Change, Security) ID Code
Processor Type:
DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs and BCUs
Program Type:
System
Initialized Default: No digits
More Codes

6SNU +ROG 6SNU

+ROG 6SNU
+ROG 6SNU
+ROG
DATA = ID code (1~15 digits)
SELECT = 8
When entering less than 15 digits, enter digits,
Telephone port number to
then press Hold.
which the CF Ext ID (security)
LED Button 01 = blanks, erases data
code will be assigned.
LED Button 02 = a wild card (can be any digit
from 1~9)
Processor Type
Port Range
Processor Type
Port Range
DK14
000~009
B1CU
000~055
DK40i
000~027
B2CAU/BU
000~111
RCTUA